Home

4 - Keysight

1. eS f P100 FOR MULTIPLEXER J105 J104 J103 J102 J107 sco 1 scom gt i 1o Fs Jio LS 83 vio g 2 1 Ls g ollo kz F1 0 O Fe amp O l z2 Fs J ol oli olks alol 5 57 Ls at fg a Fe z T 3 a kr l s O lzs 6 Fg 34 l 5 5 l3 al l 5 z 3 2 Fs 2 Fe nz F8 5 Fg 541O O LS polll 54 I 26 z LQ sollokg yollo slol ofg He amp lojLlejl Hojlojs Hol o s A a 180 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module N2260A Pinout P401 is a 96 pin male DIN connector mounted on the N2260A The connector and pin assignments are shown below 3231 30 29 28 27 26 2524 232221 20191817 1615 1413121110 9876543 21 B SEIS gy g A eeccecccccccccccccccccccccccccce A View from the Pin Side of the Connector Pin A B Cc Pin A B Cc 1 CHO_L CH1_L CH2_L 17 CH20_L CH21_L CH22_L 2 CHO_H CH1_H CH2_H 18 CH20_H CH21_H CH22_H 3 CH3_L CH4_L CH5_L 19 CH23_L CH24 L CH25_L 4 CH3_H CH4_H CH5_H 20 CH23_H CH24_H CH25_H 5 CH6_L CH7_L CH8_L 21 CH26_L CH27_L CH28_L 6 CH6_H CH7_H CH8_H 22 CH2
2. JO i p U J103 J102 J101 J100 v J104 GND GND GND GND 1 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND x 5 3 2 GND GND GND GND are 24 16 8 o 25 17 9 1 26 18 10 2 27 ag Gapa Z2 28 S 20 12 4 29 21 13 5 30 22 14 6 1 31 23 15 7 A FOR DIGITAL 1 0 A 190 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2263A 32 bit Digital I O Module N2268A Pinout P702 is a 96 pin male DIN connector mounted on the N22638A The connector and pinout assignments are shown below 32 31 30 2928 27 26 2524 23 2221 20191817 1615 1413121110 9876543 21 C C B B A A View from the Pin Side of the Connector Pin A B Cc Pin A B Cc 1 2 Not used Not used Not used f 19 BIT16 BIT17 BIT18 3 BITO BIT1 BIT2 20 GND GND GND 4 GND GND GND 21 BIT19 BIT20 BIT21 5 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5 22 GND GND GND 6 GND GND GND 23 BIT22 BIT23 GND 7 BIT6 BIT7 GND 24 GND GND GND 8 GND GND GND 25 BIT24 BIT25 BIT26 9 BIT8 BIT9 BIT10 26 GND GND GND 10 GND GND GND 27 BIT27 BIT28 BIT29 11 BIT11 BIT12 BIT13 28 GND GND GND 12 GND GND GND 29 BIT30 BIT31 GND 13 BIT14 BIT15 GND 30 GND GND GND 14 GND GND GND 31 1 O PCTL PFLG
3. COL7 COL6 COLS COL4 COL3 COL2 COL 1 COLO ROW3 ROW2 ROW1 ROWO eo a EEEE 186 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module N2262A Pinout P300 is a 96 pin male DIN connector mounted on the N2262A The connector and pinout assignments are shown below Note that the A and B rows in the connector are not used 3231 3029 28 27 26 25 24 232221 20191817 1615 1413121110 98 76 543 2 1 C CoeoeCCHCHCCOCOC OOOO COSCOEEEOES eS C B eee eaeeaeeeseeseeaeeseeaeeaeeeoeeeeee H B A eCooeeeeeeoeeoeeoeeeeoeeeeeeee A Pin Cc Pin Cc Pin Cc Pin Cc COLO_L f9 Not used 17 Not used 25 COL4_L COLO_H f 10 ROWO_L 418 ROW2_L f 26 COL4_H COL1_L 414 ROWO_H 49 ROW2_H f 97 COL5_L COL1_H f 412 Not used f 20 Not used 28 COL5_H COL2_L 413 Not used 21 Not used 29 COL6_L COL2_H f 14 ROW1_L f 22 ROW3_L 30 COL6_H COL3_L 415 ROW1_H f 23 ROW3_H 31 COL7_L COL3_H f 16 Not used f 24 Not used 32 COL7_H 187 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2263A 32 bit Digital I O Module N22638A 32 bit Digital I O Module The Agilent N2263A is a 32 bit digital I O module It provides 32 bidirectional data lines bits and 3 handshake lines used for control and handshaking All lines ar
4. B SEIS ig s A lecccecccccccccccccceccccccccccce A View from the Pin Side of the Connector Pin A B Cc Pin A B Cc 1 CHO_L CH1_L CH2_L 17 CH20_L CH21_L CH22_L 2 CHO_H CH1_H CH2_H 18 CH20_H CH21_H CH22_H 3 CH3_L CH4_L CH5_L 19 CH23_L CH24 L CH25_L 4 CH3_H CH4_H CH5_H 20 CH23_H CH24_H CH25_H 5 CH6_L CH7_L CH8_L 21 CH26_L CH27_L CH28_L 6 CH6_H CH7_H CH8_H 22 CH26_H CH27_H CH28_H 7 CH9_L Not used COMO_L f 23 CH29 L Not used COM1_L 8 CH9_H Not used COMO_H J 24 CH29_H Not used COM1_H 9 CH10_L CH11_L CH12 L f 25 CH30_L CH31_L CH32_L 10 CH10_H CH11_H CH12_H f 96 CH30_H CH31_H CH32_H 11 CH13_L CH14 L CH15 L 97 CH33_L CH34_L CH35_L 12 CH13_H CH14_H CH15_H f 9g CH33_H CH34_H CH35_H 13 CH16_L CH17_L CH18_L J 29 CH36_L CH37_L CH38_L 14 CH16_H CH17_H CH18_H f 39 CH36_H CH37_H CH38_H 15 CH19 L Not used SE COM J 31 CH39 L Not used Not used 16 CH19_H Not used SE COM J 32 CH39_H Not used Not used 205 Caution Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module The Agilent N2267A is an 8 Channel High Current GP module typically used in mobile phone battery test applications It can switch up to 8 A at 250 Vac or 5 A at 30 Vdc with decreasing current to 1 A at 125 Vdc The module includes temperature control and prote
5. O y lOld O Cy A A 240 C32 ASS 44471D J901 Pinout Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module J901 is a 3 row 48 pin male DIN connector mounted on the 44471D The pin assignments are shown in the figure below NAA BWLVWNV VLR VVVVRURA SANS ASA ASS SS SSSR AN v 2 A30 J901 on 44471D poiray CHO Ly ag CHO L may CH0 L co CHO H cay CHS H cig tito Hy pp gt CHOI L mop C8 L eg H1 Lg g CHOI Hg c10 gt CH6 H mo gt CHIH ag L rio CHW Ly poo chi2 L cay CH2 H pia Ct HY coy iah nC Lg may 8L pas CM3 L ce gt CH03 H cio CHO8H coo CHIS H m CHO4 L avg CH9 Lg mop CH4 L pa CHO4 H 14 gt CHO9 H po CHI4 H E14 NC__ c16 NC lt Bo NC__ lt Aeon lt Fig MC lt m2 lt E14 A16 C16 E16 E30 A32 C32 E32 NOTCONNECTED NC AM C2 A24 CH15 L c245 CH5 H A26 CH16 L 4 eae CHO Hy E26 CH17 L es CH7 Hg A28 CH18 L c28 H18 Hy A30 CH19 L 4 C30 gt CH19 HY Gao lt g2 MNC lt 241 Note Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module The Agilent 44472A VHF Switch Module provides two independent 4 to 1 coaxial multiplexers These multiplexers are specifical
6. oO v P eee slocoooooooo00o of A oO ie LY ae 5 RO O i 3 at et 2 S shooococoo0oooo O L H L HIJL H L H L H 5 E A E p Q O alle 8008 COOG OO Of Flt L HJE Hjt Rye He L CHOO CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 DO lt 234 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module 44470D J901 Pinout J901 is a 3 row 48 pin male connector mounted on the 44470D The pin assignments in this connector are shown below E32 630 M PR gt a a C32 C2 BW VVVLVR VW VY VV VQRVWVWVVYA DDQW DW BW DW DB DB DB_B_B_ B DW BBA Ha y x A32 A30 J901 on 44470D M borge a ELAT as CHO L oreca Ly coy Choo H Aas CHE By cig Chto HY Gaus Gitte Hy py CHO L o gt HOS _L sigs ALi pe et ep ni ci Hs HY pop CH1 H cog CHIE H yai go L ai S pp idi gs oe H c25 H07 H copo T2 H sigs OHIZ Hy pg CH3 L aio a Ly poo y CH3 L E Uy cep CH03 H cips eH cae Chis H cog oHa H 5 CHO Ly aig CH09_L mop CH4 L aap OHIO Ly ee p CHO4 H c14 gt CH9 H coq CH4 H 6505 CMIS Hy ys Tinea aie en me LCOM real aa Gig Ney aga MC lt ere OM pe NC Wf A32 C16 C32 E14 E30 E32 NOTCONNECTED NC 235 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module The Agilent 44471A GP Relay Module provides 10 independent Single Pole Single Throw SPST Form A latching relays The individual relays on
7. QOH HGH GOGH GOO VN SY CONNECT TO P401 i Mi Jil GL c c P100 FOR GP RELAY J100 z9 J106 J105 J104 J103 J102 J101 ox 1 s O O Fe stolo folol Fx 78 s4 be olo S 25 3 LS z kg es T 3 S 5 Sa 5 35 kG H z 2 eS a mr a Fr az lIs 3 To 5 E 5 ig 5 1 ae 2T 29 a oz x210 O Fe 5 z2 To com a 5 ad 5 a5 SF 8 Le BS ag 3 zolle kg oll om S 0 O Fs N S1 o 2 O F 3 Le 5 A 183 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module N2261A Pinout P401 is a 96 pin male DIN connector mounted on the N2261A The connector and pinout assignments are shown below 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 232221 20191817 1615 141312111098 76543 21 Jeeececececceccece e eeeoeeveeneneneneeoe 0 0 e eeeeeveevenee2e2e800 rood Pin A B Cc Pin A B Cc 1 CHO_L CH1_L CH2_L 17 CH20_L CH21_L CH22_L 2 CHO_H CH1_H CH2_H 18 CH20_H CH21_H CH22_H 3 CH3_L CH4_L CH5_L CH23_L CH24 L CH25_L 4 CH3_H CH4_H CH5_H CH23_H CH24_H CH25_H 5 CH6_L CH7_L CH8_L CH26_L CH27_L CH28_L 6 CH6_H CH7_H CH8_H CH26_H CH27_H CH28_H 7 CH9_L Not used Not used CH29 L
8. o Eora mE 22 a A AR e mE Ll se z E E Zok 005 0 PETTE 20 0o00 OD 0 4 fe Zo l gt D o D D g g so L a i 1 H 223 f orao HE 7 aaam j ajo caos 0o00 o cToggo 0 TOTEE D gp graouen rre C Ep TETg gE enoe pnag ogg T D CETT p CSD ono aie EEs 3 Rites p PTF apren IMS og ce O00 hah et K K K k K K k k K32 k k k 179 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module N2260A Wiring Information There are four methods available to connect to the N2260A A screw terminal block the N2290A described on page 277 A direct wiring insulation displacement connector the N2296A described on page 278 A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable the N2297A described on page 279 A DIN96 to four D25 Cable the N2299A described on page 281 The screw terminal block N2290A is shown below To use the other connection options you will need to use the module pinout information on page 181 Connect to P401 CONNECT TO P401
9. E AC CHARACTERISTICS Bandwidth 3dB 1GHz 100 MHz 0 5 Insertion Loss dB D ahs n o O 25 C 40 RH 800 MHz 18 1 GHz 2 5 100 MHz 75 Ch Ch Cross Talk dB 300 vis pa 25 C 40 RH SUME 63 i 800 MHz 55 1 GHz 50 100 MHZ 1 20 vewn o O i a 25 C 40 RH 800 MHz 1 35 1 GHz 1 55 7 Center Shield 60 pF Capacitance pF Center Center 0 006 pF Rise Time 500 ps Signal Delay 2 5 ns 324 Chapter 9 Specifications N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module Total Channels Connector Type Dual 1 to 6 Dual 1 to 4 when with option 204 SMA female Frequency Range DC to 20 GHz Insertion Loss 0 3 dB 0 015 Frequency GHz 100 dB min DC to 12 GHz Isolation 80 dB min 12 GHz to 15 GHz 70 dB min 15 GHz to 20 GHz 1 2 max DC to 4 GHz SWR 1 35 max 4 to 12 4 GHz Repeatability 5 million cycles at 25 C 1 45 max 12 4 to 18 GHz 1 7 max 18 to 20 GHz 0 03 dB maximum Switch Speed 25ms Switch Life 5 million cycles N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module The switching and attenuation characteristics of the N2276B are determined by the switches and attenuators installed in it Please refer to the switch s and or attenuator s data sheet for the specifications of your customized N2276B module 325 Chapter 9 Specifications N2280
10. 65 Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview Matrix Modules A matrix switch is the most versatile type of system switching Any input can be connected to any output individually or in combination This helps minimize the need for complex wiring and can simplify the DUT interface In addition a matrix module can be used in conjunction with other modules to provide a wide variety of switching combinations A matrix is arranged in rows and columns and a simple 4 x 4 matrix switch is shown below ee ra ra J r ot Row2 ey ie pe t Row4 Me r4 er ae pas ues aun ee Coli Col2 Col3 Col4 Matrix Switching The table below lists the available matrix modules model Module a netay Description Number Name Type Required N2262A 4 x 8 Matrix 1 Latching Each crosspoint or node of the 4 x 8 Module matrix module uses a DPST Double pole Single throw relay to switch two wires Hi amp Lo for signals up to 200V 1A 44473A 4 x 4 Matrix 1 Latching Each crosspoint or node of the 4 x 4 Module matrix module uses a DPST Double pole Single throw relay to switch two wires Hi amp Lo for signals up to 250V 2A 66 Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview Digital I O Modules The digital I O modules provide high density digital input output capabilities in an easy to control form The independent TTL compatib
11. 3 Press Enter to show the second level menu PWR ON RESET 4 To set the instrument power on to the reset state press Enter The instrument will return to the first level menu Alternately to set the instrument power on to a stored state Turn the knob until USER SET UP is displayed USER SET UP 5 Press Enter to select the stored state to use POWER ON 05 44 Q Note Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure the Power on State 6 Turn the knob to select the desired memory location i e 08 POWER ON 08 7 Press Enter to accept the stored state and return to the first level menu More information about storing states is given on page 106 of this manual POWER ON SET 8 Press the Menu key again to exit the Menu menu The CONFIG annunciator turns off If the instrument is set to power on to a previously stored setup that is no longer valid it will automatically power on to the reset state and RECALL FAILED will be displayed 45 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure the Remote Interface To Configure the Remote Interface The instrument can communicate with a computer over GPIB or RS 232 interface Only one interface can be used at a time When shipped from the factory the GPIB interface is selected and its address is set to 9 Note The RS 232 interface can be configured and used only in SCPI mode
12. Storage Environment 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 3499A 3 8 kg 8 4 lbs Net Weight 3499B 2 5 kg 5 5 Ibs 3499C 7 4 kg 16 4 Ibs 3499A H x W x L 89mm x 426mm x 348mm 3 5 x 16 8 x 13 7 Dimensions 3499B H x W x L 89mm x 213mm x 348mm 3 5 x 8 4 x 13 7 3499C H x W x L 221 5mm x 426mm x 353 5mm 8 7 x 16 8 x 13 9 Operating Altitude 3000 meters 10 000 ft IEC 61010 1 Operating Polution Degree 2 1EC61010 1 Installation Category E SYSTEM 3499A 5 slots Capacity 3499B 2 slots paciys 3499C electrically 9 slots Slot 1 6 are 1 slot width Slot 7 is 2 slot width Slot 8 9 are 3 slot width Display Vacuum fluorescent 13 characters can be displayed simultaneously Rear Panel Connectors GPIB IEEE 488 RS 232 8 pin Mini DIN connector built in 4 bit Digital I O amp built in external trigger in out Memory For 3499A B mainframe with Controller board 1 0 Firmware REV 1 0 2 0 3 0 Capable of storing 10 instrument setups and 10 errors in SCPI mode or 40 instrument setups and 1 error in 3488A mode For 3499A B C mainframe with Controller board 2 0 Firmware REV 4 0 or later Capable of storing 50 instrument setups and 10 errors in SCPI mode or 40 instrument setups and 1 error in 3488A mode 301 Chapter 9 Specifications 3499A B C Mainframe E SYSTEM continued Switch Setting Time Automatically
13. oy e Contents Chapter 4 Features and Functions 77 SCPI Language Conventions 79 Monitoring a Channel or a Slot 80 Switching a Relay Channel 82 Configuring a Multiplexer Module 83 Parallel Switching 84 Scanning 85 Digital I O Operation 95 State Storage 106 Error Conditions 108 Self Test 109 Display Control 110 Relay Cycle Counts 111 To Select the System Mode 112 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 113 SCPI Command Syntax 115 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference 116 3499A B C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped 122 Switch Commands 127 Specific Plug in Module Commands 129 Scanning Commands 132 Digital I O Commands 139 State Storage Commands 147 Status System Commands 148 System Information Commands 153 System Level Control Commands 156 RS 232 Commands 160 About the SCPI Language 161 Chapter 6 Error Messages 165 Execution Errors 167 Instrument Errors 170 Self Test Errors 172 10 Contents Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 173 N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module 176 N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module 182 N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module 185 N22638A 32 bit Digital I O Module 188 N2264A Multifunction Module 192 N2265A Multifunction Module 196 N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module 200 N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module 206 N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module 210 N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module 212 N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module 214 N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX
14. DATA LINES XZ SZ FA DATA VALID Read Operation t1 Time from output disable to T O line VODIRECTION high 100 us min t2 Time from I O line high to start of STROBE PCTL LINE Strobe 150 us Pogo b ka minimum 100 us 150us 20 ps t3 Strobe pulse width 20 us minimum When used during a Read operation the Strobe pulse signifies that the 3499A B C has latched read the data from the data lines 100 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Read and Write Strobe Mode 4 Read and Write Strobe Mode 4 uses the I O direction line as a Strobe pulse to indicate writing operations The PCTL line is used to indicate Read operations It is thus similar to the R W and Strobe Mode 3 except separate control lines are used for the Strobe pulses and there is no I O direction line DATA LINES ASS SSS SSL DATA VALID Write Operation t1 Time from data valid to write IO DIRECTION WR Strobe as VA 40 us minimum sy ra t2 Strobe pulse width 40us 20us 20 us minimum The IO Direction line is used to indicate that the data is valid on the data bus lines IO Direction is used to trigger the receiving device Read Operation DATA LINES i WHA WA DATA VALID t1 Time from output disable to read Strobe 100 us Pe minimum 100 us 20 us t2 Strobe pulse width 20 us minimum PCTL RD LINE As in Mode 8 the PCTL RD line is used to indicate to the send
15. E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Capacitance Open Channel lt 7 pF with 1 channel closed Channel Channel lt 10 pF Channel Chassis lt 25 pF Insertion Loss 100 kHz lt 0 20 dB with 500 termination Ve lt 0 25 dB 10 MHz lt 0 50 dB Crosstalk 100 Ne lt 73 dB with 5029 termination Tes lt 53 dB 10 MHz lt 33 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 334 Chapter 9 Specifications 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 20 Maximum Voltage Terminal Terminal or Terminal Chassis 250 V dc or ac rms Maxim m Curent Per Channel 1 A dc or ac rms u Per Module 20 A dc or ac rms Maximum Power Per Channel 60 W dc 125 VA ac j Per Module 1200 W dc 2500 VA ac Maximum Overvoltage 1400 Vpk Transients Thermal Offset lt 3 uV differential or single ended Initial Closed Channel lt 1Q Resistance Relay Life Dry Load of lt 300 mA amp lt 10 V 108 yale Maximum Rated Load 10 Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION Open Channel lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q Channel Channel lt 40 C 95 RH gt 109Q with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 40 C 60 RH gt 5x10 Q with 1 channel
16. FaN i i a NC 3 lt ORG 1 lt i ORG l RELAY ONO K902 i 2 YEL C 45 lt 1 eG Cc CHANNEL 01 a NC l z lt z i Ligy NC 3 lt j ORG 1 lt i ORG RELAY ONO i K903 l i 2 YEL c 45 lt r lt C C gt CHANNEL 02 7 COM l NC 5 a i Z 1 1 2 NC l 3 RG lt 2 L901 5V 5 TO DRIVE JUMPERS YEL C906 V NOTE TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS INSIDE THE DASHED BOXES REFER TO THE 33311B ONLY MODULE PANEL DESIGNATORS OUTSIDE THE DASHED BOXES ARE THOSE SILKSCREENED ON THE 44476A PANEL ANY REFERENCE IN THIS MANUAL TO A PORT REFERS TO THE MODULE PANEL DESIGNATORS 258 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44476A Microwave Switch Module 44476A Wiring Information The 44476A provides nine 50 Q SMA connectors DDE 2 ae GD DDE gii OO EEO E O a NO C NC NO NO C NC A 259 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44476B Microwave Switch Module 44476B Microwave Switch Module The 44476B is not supplied with microwave switches You must provide your own microwave switches mount them on the assembly and connect one of the module s Form C relay drive circuits to each switch The 44476B panel has two 53 8 X 9 6 mm cutouts for a set of microwave switches The recommended Agilent microwave switches are lis
17. SE Sibi tie piaia upea Enan Aei e a E tee es N2267A Wiring Information The N2267A rear panel has two connectors an SMB for the over temperature warning signal and a 16 pin male connector for connections to the relay contacts tf Agilent o o2 o3 o o 0 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e O N2267A ir 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GP RELAY WARNING INPUTS 250VAC 8A MAX A The 16 pin connector on the rear panel is an AMP Metrimate In Line Connector Right Angle Header 207544 1 An Agilent N2327A terminal block can be used to make the connections to the N2267A Included in the N2327A are an AMP Metrimate In Line Connector Plug 207542 1 and an AMP Contact Type IIT Socket AWG18 14 66360 2 Refer to page 282 for more information about the N2327A WARNING Voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 Vpk or 60 Vdc present an electric shock hazard Disconnect source voltages before removing or connecting the source to module I O connector or wiring the connector All field wiring must be rated for the highest voltage applied to any single channel 208 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module N2267A Pinout J200 is a 16 pin male connector mounted on the rear panel of the N2267A The pinout assignments are shown below Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name 1 CH7_H 9 CH3_H 2 CH7_L 10 CH3_L 3 CH6_H 11 CH2_H 4 CH6_L 12 CH2_L 5 CH5_H 13 CH1_H 6 CH5 _L 14 CH1_L 7 C
18. E clleee i Jlooolfe Z Os 6 ci4 o 3 leee ooo Q ey TE Cig 1 i a sooo Joool s es 8 C22 i i E Slleee ooo Z eo 1 9 C25 lt jeoo ooo 6 eo 10 C27 i S vlleee jfooolfe LF ee 1 4 cag ae eo e 5 2o oo ooo o i 12 C31 1 1 5 zooo ooo o o 1 143 i alleee i llooolfe e 1 44 c2 1 5 2 eee lloooll 8 es 145 c4 2 4 S Roo o pooo amp z e 16 C6 1 i Z slleee ooo k a eo i AT c8 i O glleee ooo a o ATT 14 1 18 C11 1 2 R j o oo 1 fooolf oO 1 19 Cis i o glleee i foool s 20 cig Rlleee ooo l i c8 os 21 C23 1 1 a Sooo ooo S 3 1 22 c26 D slleee i oooi amp 1 33 C28 i o S o elleee 1 fooolls 1 24 c30 1 gi o oo i oooj j amp 25 c32 S ooo oooj j e t i slleee WOOO fe Rene ean a i o o o 0001 8 Note A indicates the pin is not used i oma i f 280 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information N2299A DIN96 to quad D25 Cable The N2297A is a female DIN96 to four male D25 Cable The cable uses 26 AWG wire which meets UL AWM 2464 with overall foil shield The maximum voltage is 200 volts per wire The figure below shows the connections between the D96 and the four D25s Refer to the specific plug in module wiring information for details about the connector and pin out assignments N2299A DIN96 TO QUAD D25 CABLE e 25 lt InO feo Se 0068 z a jes 000 ia id 000 o 2
19. I O LINES Number of Bits 16 Maximum Voltage Line Chassis 30 V dc Vout high gt 2 4V I lt 8 mA output wo tie 1 Vout low lt 0 4V 1 lt 16 mA input Output Characteristics I low 125 mA Vout low lt 1 25 V fused at 250 mA TEENS Vin high gt 2 0V Input Characteristics Vin low lt 08V E HANDSHAKE LINES Maximum Voltage Line Chassis 5 V de ate Vout high gt 2 4 V I lt 400 uA output OltpULCharasterlanes Vout low lt 0 5 V I lt 2 mA input M aaa Vin high gt 2 0V Input Characteristics Vin low lt 08V E External Increment El 4 Minimum TTL Pulse Width 0 25 us Channel Closed CC Minimum TTL Pulse Width 10 us a Both El and CC lines are used for external controlled scanning The 3499A B C will advance to the next channel in the scan list on the falling edge of El pulse b When the next channel closes the 44474A outputs a CC pulse to trigger the voltmeter 341 Chapter 9 Specifications 44475A Breadboard Module 44475A Breadboard Module Components required but not supplied are to be mounted on the Breadboard Refer to the manufacturers data sheet for load drive specifications of these components see page 251 for a list of required components E MODULE DIMENSIONS 104mm x 74mm and 79mm x 74mm Component Area Available 4 1 x 2 9 and 3 1 x 2 9 Grid Hole Spacing center center 2 54mm x 2 54 mm 0 1 x 0 1 Grid Hole Size insi
20. I9 microwave 9 7 COM NE l l SWITCH l l l i R 3 H ORG i I 1 w1 ORG a eet i lt Ti I l ii l RELAY NO 1 K902 2 veL NSTALLED i f HANNEL 01 5 lt f O MICROWAVE j i 7 COM me l SWITCH i R 3 H ORG o I yes eS ee ee ew i 1 i I I i NO RELAY CHANNEL 02 y e l AVAILABLE Z COM l BUT NOT i Ne USED I 3 45V et e 5 TO DRIVE JUMPERS YEL C906 V 262 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44476B Microwave Switch Module Configuration Mount user supplied microwave switches on the module after connecting the channels 00 and 01 drive jumpers W1 and W2 The figure below shows the drive jumper orientation SIDE VIEW DRIVE JUMPER PLUG TOP VIEW ORANGE COAXIAL SWITCH DC m 18 GHz ORANGE 263 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44476B Microwave Switch Module The figure below shows an Agilent 8764B 5 port switch mounted on the 44476B Lay drive jumpers flat M2 5 X 18 against PC board Panhead Screws _ Max Mounting sa Area j D 14 1 mm 66 mm 62 mm q M All mounting holes threaded for M2 5 screws 44476B Wiring Information The user provided switches use 50 Q SMA connectors except the Agilent 8762F which uses 75 Q SMA connectors Aiden T7TVDC MAX MICROWAVE SWITCH 1 Ne 3 4 5 I 1 N2 i 3 4 1s 1WCW CHAN emon CHD 00 01 A
21. N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module on page 315 N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module on page 317 N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module on page 319 N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module on page 321 N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module on page 323 N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module on page 325 N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module on page 325 N2280A Quadruple 1 to 2 Optical Switch Module on page 326 N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module on page 327 N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module on page 328 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module on page 329 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module on page 331 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module on page 333 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module on page 335 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module on page 337 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module on page 339 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module on page 341 44475A Breadboard Module on page 342 44476A Microwave Switch Module on page 344 44476B Microwave Switch Module on page 344 44477A Form C Relay Module on page 345 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules on page 347 300 Chapter 9 Specifications 3499A B C Mainframe 3499A B C Mainframe E GENERAL For 3499A B 100 to 127 Vac 50Hz to 400 Hz 200 to 240 Vac 50Hz to 60 Hz Power Supply 90 VA maximum For 3499C 100 to 240 Vac 50Hz to 60 Hz 140 VA maximum Operating Environment 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F lt 80 RH 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F
22. 3 H LHL HLHEL 44473A MATRIX SWITCH 250V MAX 247 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module The Agilent 44474A Digital I O module provides 16 bidirectional data lines bits plus 4 lines used for control and handshaking All lines are TTL compatible The 16 I O lines or bits can be addressed individually bit by bit as two independent 8 bit ports or as one 16 bit word The two 8 bit ports are completely independent of each other and may be used separately For instance one port can be used for output operations while the other for input However all 8 bits in a given port must be either input or output bits not a combination of input and output Five handshaking modes are available for this module The handshaking modes are described beginning on page 98 Handshaking uses up to three control lines Peripheral Control PCTL I O direction I O Peripheral Flag PFLG or EI Additionally the 44474A provides an additional Channel Closed CC line that changes state to indicate a channel has been closed The External Increment EI and Channel Closed CC lines can be used to control an external instrument such as a DMM For example Agilent DMMs have a Voltmeter Complete line that indicates when a measurement has completed This line is connected to the 44474A EI input and the Channel Closed output is connected to the DMM External Trigger When proper
23. Error code Remote Interface Operation SYSTem ERRor Read and clear one error from the error queue Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 80 characters 118 Undefined header 166 101 102 103 105 108 109 112 113 Chapter 6 Error Messages Execution Errors Execution Errors Invalid character An invalid character was found in the command string You may have used an invalid character such as or in the command header or within a parameter Example OPEN 101 Syntax error Invalid syntax was found in the command string You may have inserted a blank space before or after a colon in the command header or before a comma Or you may have omitted the character in the channel list syntax Examples ROUT CHAN DEL 1 or ROUT OPEN 101 102 Invalid separator An invalid separator was found in the command string You may have used a comma instead of a colon semicolon or blank space You omitted a blank space between the SCPI command the first parameter Example TRIG COUNT 1 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET is not allowed within a command string Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for this command You may have entered an extra parameter or added a parameter to a command that does not require a parameter Example ROUT CLOS STAT 2 Missing parameter Fewer parameters
24. Front Panel Operation Use the S List menu to set the scan configuration as shown below Press S List Turn knob Press Enter Turn the knob to select the arm source Press Enter Use arrow keys and knob to select the arm count Press Enter Turn the knob to select the trigger source Press Enter Turn the knob to select DELAY TIME Press Enter Turn the knob to select ALL channels or individual channels Press Enter Use arrow keys and knob to select the delay time Press Enter Press S List to exit the menu If you select TIMER for either arm source or trigger source an additional menu is shown that enables you to set the time in seconds Remote Interface Operation The following code sets the scan sweep to immediately start the channel scan is advanced by the timer and 10 sweeps of the scan list will occur A 2 second delay is also set for channel 101 ARM SOURce IMMediate ARM COUNt 10 TRIGger SOURce TIMer TRIGger TIMer 5 Set arm source to IMM Set arm count to 10 times Set trigger source to TIMer Set the trigger timer to 5 seconds ROUTe CHANnel DELAY 2 101 Seta 2 second time delay for channel 101 91 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning Performing a Scan Once you set up a scan list and configure the scan the actual scan can be performed If a scan list contains a non existing channel the scan cannot be performed and an error will occur If a sca
25. Ge a SO OOCOCECCECECECCECELE CCEE ccad oce CCOCOOCOOOO ME GGG GGG CAAA EGAGADGOAGE OO EC OW COS OIG Edod OL C O amp GGGGGEEGEGaE HOOGOROO sOOOOO O GF TO oO OXON OX GMB eX OX KOK CX OXONSHS js ne to backplane connector supplied SOGCHHCHCEOOO SOOOOOCOOOG rou 0 08 COC Connection wo amp Z Q THI ON COMPONENTS Connection to screw terminal block connector supplied 252 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44475A Breadboard Module 44475A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic of the breadboard interface is shown below The 44475A is divided into two areas They are 1 Breadboarding Grid consisting of holes on 0 10 inch centers There is 0 030 inch spacing between foil pads Bus traces for power supply and ground and provisions for the screw terminal block edge connector are provided 2 Built in design for providing an 8 bit digital input port and an 8 bit digital output port MAOO a WON 253 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44475A Breadboard Module 44475A Wiring Information Use the Agilent 44485A Terminal Block to make connections to the 44475A One 44485A is supplied with the module Included with the terminal block is a numbered label you can apply for slot identification The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external wiring to the 44475A The screw terminal is s
26. N2264A module 192 N2265A module 196 N2266A module 200 N2267A module 206 N2268A module 210 N2270A module 212 N2272A module 214 N2280A module 225 N2281A module 226 N2282A module 228 power on instrument 15 29 power on state setting 44 protection networks 272 N2276A B module 217 221 353 R R W and Strobe Mode 3 100 Rack Mount 23 Read and Write Strobe Mode 4 101 read from port 104 read or write and strobe mode 3 100 read relay cycles 111 Rear Panel 6 rear panel connectors 301 recall instrument state 107 by including into scan list 89 by setting power on to 44 relay cycle count 111 relay protection 272 remote interface configuration 46 remote interface GPIB IEEE 488 address selection 47 remote interface RS 232 baud rate 48 49 data bits 48 50 default setting 48 flow control 48 50 parity 48 50 remove module from mainframe 17 reset 22 states 74 ROUTe CHANnel DELay 136 DELay 136 CLOSe 127 STATe 128 CLOSe 127 CPAir 129 CPAir 129 DIAGnostic SPEEK 131 FUNCtion 130 FUNCtion 130 OPEN 128 ROUTe OPEN 128 SCAN LIST 132 LIST 132 SIZE 132 SCAN CLEar 132 RS 232 Interface baud rate 48 49 connector 6 data bits 48 50 default setting 48 described 48 flow control 48 50 parity 48 50 selecting interface 49 RTS CTS 48 S scan list 38 list clear 39 viewing list 40 scan list rules 79 115 viewing 40 scanning arm Layer 87 arm source selection 91 clearing scan list 89
27. Not used Not used 8 CH9_H Not used Not used CH29_H Not used Not used 9 CH10_L CH11_L CH12_L CH30_L CH31_L CH32_L 10 CH10_H CH11_H CH12_H f 26 CH30_H CH31_H CH32_H 11 CH13_L CH14 L CH15 L f 27 CH33_L CH34_L CH35_L 12 CH13_H CH14_H CH15_H f 2g CH33_H CH34_H CH35_H 13 CH16_L CH17_L CH18_ L f 29 CH36_L CH37_L CH38_L 14 CH16_H CH17_H CH18_H f 39 CH36_H CH37_H CH38_H 15 CH19 L Not used Not used f 31 CH39 L Not used Not used 16 CH19_H Notused Not used 32 CH39_H Not used Not used 184 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module The Agilent N2262A 4 x 8 Matrix module contains 32 2 wire nodes crosspoints organized in a 4 row by 8 column configuration Each node in the matrix contains a 2 wire latching relay for switching both Hi H and Lo L terminals of a signal line Multiple switches can be closed allowing any combination of row to column connections The parallel switching feature makes it well suited for high speed switching applications Up to 8 2 wire node crosspoint relays in the same row can be closed all at once parallel switching The N2262A provides a convenient way to connect multiple test instruments to multiple test points on a device or to multiple devices Multiple N2262A modules can be connected together or used in conjunction with other modules such as the N
28. Number of Bits 16 Maximum Voltage Line Chassis 42 V dc Maximum Sink Current Per Bit 600 mA PIANA Vout high gt 2 4 V I lt 10 mA output Output Characteristdes vouniow lt 0 8 V I lt 600 mA input PEEN Vin high gt 2 0V Input Characteristics Vin low lt 08V E HANDSHAKE LINES Maximum Voltage Line Chassis 5 V de Vout high gt 2 4 V I lt 400 pA output Output Characteristics Vout low lt 0 5V I lt 1 mA input lout low lt 25 mA when shorted to 5 V ree Vin high gt 2 0V Input Characteristics Vin low lt 08V 314 Chapter 9 Specifications N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 80 1 wire or 40 2 wire or dual 20 2 wire or 20 4 wire Maximum Switching Terminal Terminal or 200 V dc or peak AC Resist Voltage Terminal Chassis Maximum Switching Per Channel 0 5 A dc or peak AC Resist Current Per Module 1 A dc or peak AC Resist Maximum Switching Per Channel 10 W dc or peak AC Resist Power Per Module 20 W dc or peak AC Resist Thermal Offset Per Channel 50 uV differential or single ended Initial Closed Channel lt 19 Resistance Relay Life 1V 1mA 10 Maximum Scan Rate 350 Chans sec E DC CHARACTERISTICS Open Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 101 A Channel Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed HI LO lt 40 C 50
29. O 303 Chapter 9 Specifications N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE without terminal block Open Channel Channel lt 7 pF 2 wire lt 7 pF dual 2 wire Capacitance Channel with 1 channel closed HI LO lt 75 pF 2 wire lt 45 pF dual 2 wire Channel Chassis lt 150 pF 2 wire lt 90 pF dual 2 wire insertion Loss 100 kHz lt 0 10 dB with 50Q termination We Rete 10 MHz lt 1 50 dB Crosstalk 100 kHz lt 70 dB 2 wire lt 40 dB 1 wire with 509 termination 1 MHz lt 50 dB 2 wire lt 25 dB 1 wire 10 MHz lt 30 dB 2 wire NA 1 wire a With chassis of all instruments connected and with the Lo Terminal of the input connected to the Lo Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 304 Chapter 9 Specifications N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 40 Terminal Terminal or Maxim m Voitage Terminal Chassis 200 V dc or ac rms Maxim m Curt nt Per Channel 1 A dc or ac rms Per Module 20 A dc or ac rms tiaxim m Power Per Channel 60 W dc 62 5 VA ac Per Module 1200 W dc 1250 VA ac Thermal Offset Per Channel lt 3 uV Initial Closed lt 0 5Q Channel Resistance ign Mechanical 108 at 36000 operations hour Relay Life Electrical 5 x 108 1A load Maxim
30. SRQ OFF and press Enter The instrument returns to the first level of the menu Press Menu again to exit the menu The CONFIG annunciator turns off 47 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure the Remote Interface RS 232 Interface RS 282 interface can be selected and its baud rate parity and flow control mode can be configured from the front panel Baud Rate The baud rate can be set to one of the following 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 or 57600 The factory default setting is 9600 Parity and Data Bits The parity and data bits can be set to one of the following None 8 bits Even 7 bits or Odd 7 bits The factory default setting is None 8 bits Flow Control The flow control can be set to one of the following None factory default setting XON XOFF DTR DSR RTS CTS None In this mode data is sent and received over the interface without any flow control When using this method use a slower baud rate lt 9600 baud and avoid sending more than 128 characters without stopping or reading a response XON XOFF This mode uses special characters embedded in the data stream to control the flow If the instrument is addressed to send data it continues sending data until the KOFF 183p character is received When the XON character 11 is received the instrument resumes sending data DTR DSR In this mode the instrument monitors the state of the DSR data set ready line on
31. Wait 4 second 70 OUTPUT 709 CLOSE 100 103 Close channels 100 through 103 80 OUTPUT 709 OPEN 100 103 Open channels 100 through 103 100 LINES 150 TO 200 SET UP A TIMER CONTROLLED SCANNING 110 3499A B C SCAN SWEEP CHANNELS 100 THROUGH 139 TWO TIMES 120 THE CHANNELS ARE SCANNED CONTINUOUSLY 130 THE SECOND SCAN SWEEP STARTS 1 SECOND AFTER THE START 140 OF THE FIRST SCAN SWEEP 150 T 709 SCAN 100 103 Create a scan list 160 T 709 ARM SOUR TIMER Set arm source to timer 170 T 709 ARM TIMER 1 Interval time between two scan sweeps is 1 second 180 OUTPUT 709 ARM COUNT 2 Set scan sweep 2 times 190 OUTPUT 709 TRIG SOUR IMM Set trigger source to IMM default 200 OUTPUT 709 CHAN DELAY 0 100 103 Set channel delay time Ito 0 default 210 OUTPUT 709 INIT Start scanning 220 OUTPUT 709 OPC Wait until scan finishes 230 ENTER 709 Retstr 240 Done END 298 Specifications Specifications Specification for the mainframe and all plug in modules are given in this chapter for easy reference This chapter includes 3499A B C Mainframe on page 301 N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module on page 303 N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module on page 305 N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module on page 307 N2263A 32 bit Digital I O Module on page 309 N2264A Multifunction Module on page 310 N2265A Multifunction Module on page 313
32. an interrupt on the GPIB SRQ line when one or more specific events occur called SRQ interrupt Not all GPIB cards support SRQ enabled interrupts CLS This command clears all the event registers and the Status Byte register It does not affect the enable registers It also clears the error queue 149 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Status System Commands The Operation Status Register The 3499A B C uses only three of the bits in this 16 bit register Bit 0 indicates the instrument is waiting in the trigger layer the next trigger event will advance the scan list Bit 1 indicates the instrument is waiting in the arm layer the next trigger event will move the instrument to the trigger layer Bit 4 indicates a scan has started STATus OPERation CONDition Since the condition register is updated in real time you will generally not use this register query For example bit 4 will never appear to be set since you cannot read the register at the time a scan starts STATus OPERation EVENt This query returns the binary weighted sum of the values in the event register These bits are latched from the condition register and indicate that an event has occurred at some time since the register was last cleared Sending this query clears all bits in the register STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt OPERation ENABle These commands work with the enable register The enable register is a mask us
33. chapter describe the features using both the front panel and the remote interface using SCPI commands The examples in this chapter are general For specific procedures using the front panel refer to Chapter 2 For SCPI command information refer to Chapter 5 The following sections are included in this chapter Monitoring a Channel or a Slot on page 80 Switching a Relay Channel on page 82 Configuring a Multiplexer Module on page 83 Parallel Switching on page 84 Scanning on page 85 Digital I O Operation on page 95 State Storage on page 106 Error Conditions on page 108 Self Test on page 109 Display Control on page 110 Relay Cycle Counts on page 111 To Select the System Mode on page 112 The following conventions are used for the front panel operation All keys on the front panel keyboard are expressed in bold font and normally associated with a press For example press Mon All the front panel display annunciators are expressed in bold font followed by an annunciator For example MON annunciator The information shown on the front panel display is enclosed within a pair of quotation marks Shift Recall indicates the sequential operation first press Shift then press Recall 1 Also applicable to keys Card Reset Scan and S List 78 Chapter 4 Features and Functions SCPI Language Conventions SCPI Language Conventions Throughout this manual the following conventions are used for SCPI
34. command syntax for remote interface programming Square brackets indicate optional keywords or parameters Braces enclose parameter choices within a command string Angle brackets lt gt enclose parameters for which you must specify a value A vertical bar separates multiple parameters Rules for Using a Channel or Scan List Many of the SCPI commands include a channel list or scan list parameter which allows you to specify one or more channels The channel number has the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number You can specify a slot a single channel multiple channels or a range of channels as described below The following command closes a single channel channel 11 on the module installed in slot 1 ROUT CLOS 111 The following command closes multiple channels on modules in slots 1 and 2 ROUT CLOS 111 112 203 204 The following command closes a range of channels When you specify a range of channels the range may contain invalid channels they are ignored but the first and last channel in the list must be valid ROUT CLOS 101 111 Additional information about channel and slot numbering is given on page 70 79 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Monitoring a Channel or a Slot Monitoring a Channel or a Slot You may need to continuously monitor the current status of a particular switching channel a digital I O port or an entire plug in mod
35. creating scan list 89 external mode 93 from front panel 38 general rules 85 idle state 87 initiating and stopping 92 process description 86 scan procedure description 86 starting 92 trigger layer 88 scanning 3488A mode default settings 75 scanning SCPI mode arm count selection 91 default settings 75 90 delay time setting 91 SCPI command abbreviated 162 alphabetical reference 116 application programs 291 293 296 298 channel list 115 functional reference 122 implied commandes 162 linking commands 163 parameters 163 scan list 115 syntax 79 115 161 SCPI Mode Defaults 76 SCPI mode selection 112 screw terminal blocks summary 275 self test 15 51 109 SENSe DIGital DATA 142 BIT 142 BLOCK 143 TRACe 146 TRACE DATA 146 serial number 53 slot monitoring 80 slot numbers 19 SOURce DIGital CONTrol POLarity 141 POLarity 141 DATA 144 BIT 143 BLOCK 144 POLarity 141 TRACe 146 FLAG POLarity 141 POLarity 141 IO POLarity 141 POLarity 141 MODE 140 MODE 140 354 SOURce DiGital TRACe DATA 146 DEFine 145 CATalog 145 DEFine 145 DELete 145 ALL 145 specifications 38499A B C 301 44470A 329 44470A 329 44471A 333 44471A 333 44471D 335 44472A 337 44472A 338 44473A 339 44473A 339 44474A 341 44475A 342 44476A 344 44476B 344 44477A 345 44477A 345 44478A 347 mainframe 301 N2260A 303 N2261A 305 N2262A 307 N2263A 309 N2264A 310 N2265A 313 N2267A 317 N2268A 319 N2270A 3
36. s00 s01 s78 s79 2 Wire Mode s00 s07 s38 s39 Dual 2 Wire Mode s00 s07 s38 s39 4 Wire Mode s00 s01 s18 s19 N2267A s00 s01 s02 SO7 8 Channel High Current GP Module N2268A s00 s01 s02 s03 s10 s11 s12 s13 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Module a A channel number on a matrix module is formed in Slot Row Column format i e channel address s23 means row 2 column 3 in Slot s b The N2260A and N2266A can be used as an 80 channel 1 wire MUX module a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module two 20 channel 2 wire MUX modules or a 20 channel 4 wire MUX module c The Low L terminals of the 40 2 wire channels form the first 40 1 wire channels Channels 00 39 and the High H terminals of the 40 2 wire channels form the second 40 1 wire channels Channels 40 79 d The first channels CH00 amp CH20 of either banks BANK 0 and BANK 1 form Channel 00 the second channels CH01 amp CH21 of either banks form Channel 01 and so on 71 Chapter 3 System Overview Channel and Slot Addressing Plug in Module Channel Addressing snn s Slot Number nn Channel Number N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module s00 s01 s02 SO7 N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module s00 s01 s02 s07 N2276A B Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module Two 1 to 4 6 Microwave Switch s00 s01 s02 s03 s04 s05 s10 s11 12 13 14 s15 Two Attenuators s20 s3
37. the N2297A described on page 279 A DIN96 to four D25 Cable the N2299A described on page 281 The screw terminal block N2290A is shown below To use the other connection options you will need to use the pinout information on page 205 CONNECT TO P401 ie AG P100 FOR MULTIPLEXER J105 J104 J103 J102 J107 EZ scom scou g7 1 J100 g g J106 S 8a J101 st 1T o ollo k Hollo F O OFZ Fe Fg 510l l3 3 8 z Ls s Fe oll om FO FR Fe Oks olloh soll om S O FE p Fg 51 Ls ollo 51 0 8 z 8 2 ts nt Fe oz Tg 5 Fg 5 l 5 5 S 3 5 3 LOS yollo ojll oke ofgz HO t1 s1 18 lol Lol A eae _ _ 204 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module N2266A Pinout P401 is a 96 pin male DIN connector mounted on the N2266A The connector and pin assignments are shown below 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 2524 232221 20191817 1615 141312111098 76543 21
38. 1 to 4 MUX Module on page 210 N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module on page 212 N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module on page 214 N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module on page 217 e N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module on page 221 N2280A Quadruple 1 to 2 Optical Switch Module on page 225 e N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module on page 226 N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module on page 228 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module on page 230 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module on page 233 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module on page 236 174 Note Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module on page 239 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module on page 242 44473A 4x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module on page 245 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module on page 248 44475A Breadboard Module on page 251 44476A Microwave Switch Module on page 257 44476B Microwave Switch Module on page 260 44477A Form C Relay Module on page 265 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules on page 267 Protection Networks on page 272 Terminals and Connections Information on page 275 You should not remove or install modules while the instrument is power on If a module is accidentally removed or installed while the instrument power is on the instrument will preform a reset Reset conditions are described beginning on page 74 175 Chapter 7 Plug in M
39. 105 general rules 95 operation described 95 read from port 104 read port 31 write port 32 write to port 105 Digital I O configuration control line polarity 96 data display format 96 data line polarity 96 default settings 95 flag line polarity 96 flow control mode 33 front panel 33 T O line polarity 96 350 Digital I O input output general rules 139 write to port 32 Digital I O modules general information 67 DIN Connector 7 Display 5 display message 110 DTR DSR 48 dual 2 wire mode 178 E EI CC 93 enable disable EI CC 42 enable disable trigger out pulse 42 94 error messages 166 errors execution 167 instrument 170 errors viewing clearing 36 108 errors self test 172 example program VB net 296 Visual BASIC 293 Visual C 291 example programs Agilent BASIC 298 Visual BASIC 293 execution errors 167 external trigger 93 general rules 93 configuration 94 external trigger 3488A mode built in TRIG IN TRIG OUT specifications 302 configuration 42 EI CC specifications 341 external trigger SCPI mode built in TRIG IN TRIG OUT specifications 302 configuration 42 EI CC specifications 341 F factory default 74 Features 2 FIFO 108 Filler Panels 7 26 firmware revision 52 revision 4 0 44 revision differences 106 flow control mode description DIO modules full handshake mode 5 102 read and write strobe mode 4 101 read or write and strobe mode 3 100 static mode 1 99 static mode 2 99 flow control mode
40. 15 18 Not used Not used Not used 32 GND GND GND 191 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2264A Multifunction Module N2264A Multifunction Module The Agilent N2264A multifunction module combines a GP relay function a high current GP relay function and a digital input output function on a single module It consists of 12 Channel GP relays non latching Form A 3 Channel High current GP relays non latching Form A capable of switching up to 5 amps 16 bit Digital I O The parallel switching feature makes the module well suited for high speed switching applications Any 10 of the 15 GP relays on the N2264A can be closed all at once parallel switching Additional information about parallel switching is given on page 84 Five handshaking modes are available for the digital I O function The handshaking modes are described beginning on page 98 Handshaking uses up to three control lines Peripheral Control PCTL I O direction I O Peripheral Flag PFLG Port and bit numbering is show in the table below Note that the ports are numbered differently if you are using the 3488 System mode Operating Mode 16 Bit Port 8 Bit Port Bit PORT 30 Bits 30 37 SCPI mode PORT 30 PORT 31 Bits 38 45 PORT 30 Bits 30 37 3488A Mode PORT 32 PORT 31 Bits 38 45 Specifications for the N2264A are given on page 310 192 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2
41. 264 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44477A Form C Relay Module 44477A Form C Relay Module The Agilent 44477A consists of seven independent break before make SPDT Form C latching relays one contact normally open one contact normally closed The 44477A can be used for signal switching or power applications 250V 2A Additionally this module is ideally suited for driving remote RF coaxial and microwave devices such as the Agilent 8761 8762A B C 8763B C and 8764B C switches or programmable step attenuators like the 876xx series You can use the 3499A B C 5 V power supply available on the module or provide an external supply to use as pull ups on either the NO or NC paths The 3499A B C identifies this module as a 44471A on the front panel display Changing the state of channels other than channels 00 through 06 does not generate an error but has no effect Specifications for the 44477A are given on page 345 44477A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is given on the next page The 44477A consists of seven independent Form C relays K901 K907 which are numbered as channels 00 through 06 Closing a channel relay will connect the normally open NO contact to the common port C After power on or a reset the Form C relays on the 44477A have their normally open NO contacts open and normally closed NC contacts closed Each relay circuit has mounting holes JM901 JM914 used to adda pull up resistor from the
42. 3 vt SS oS 8 3 i 3 3 x gt gt ae 2 e peko pea o D ao i i g Q 1 _ wo wo i Sse Nye Nye Ne z a amp i o N Ew Law N i G 5 5 20 T i ii nA pans i 6 Io D 5 D a 2A 2 i A 5x a 5 i a QZ E im amp c A 2 dee 3 o 4 2 Pa o i z 7 char i z 5s i KES A pe g Hes amp 5s a j ooz E oa I 197 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2265A Multifunction Module N2265A Wiring Information There are four methods available to connect to the N2265A A screw terminal block the N2295A described on page 277 A direct wiring insulation displacement connector the N2296A described on page 278 A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable the N2297A described on page 279 A DIN96 to four D25 Cable the N2299A described on page 281 The screw terminal block N2295A is shown below To use the other connection options you will need to use the pinout information on page 199 CONNECT TO P600 J103 GVO GH OHO GHHO GOO PorT41 a 1 Joi J100 COCOCOOCOCOCOCOCOCOOOOOO GND GND PCTL GND PFLG 1 0 40 H L H L H L YH LY H LY H LPH LY HL ROWS ROW2 ROW ROWO COL3 COL2 COL1 COLO FOR MULTIFUNCTION 42 43 44 53
43. 3 0 see page 59 for more details When shipped from the factory the instrument is set to the SCPI mode Perform the following procedure to select the desired system mode for the instrument before any operation 1 Press Menu the CONFIG annunciator lights up Turn the knob until SYSTEM MODE is displayed then press Enter SYSTEM MODE 2 Turn the knob until the desired system mode i e 3488A MODE is displayed then press Enter HP 3488A MODE 3 The instrument will be reset if the system mode has been changed Otherwise it retains the current mode and you can press Menu again to exit this operation Switching between SCPI mode and 3488A mode will reset the instrument to the factory default settings except the GPIB address which will retain its last setting This manual describes programming in the SCPI mode For information about the 3488 programming mode please visit www agilent com 112 Remote Interface Reference Remote Interface Reference This chapter describes SCPI Commands Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments and summarizes IEEE 488 2 Common Commands applicable to the Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System The chapter contents include SCPI Command Syntax on page 115 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference on page 116 3499A B C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped on page 122 Switch Commands on page 127 Specific Plug in Module Commands on page 1
44. 6 Error Messages Instrument Errors Query UNTERMINATED The instrument was addressed to talk i e send data over the interface but a command has not been received which sends data to the output buffer For example you may have executed a ROUTe command which does not generate data and then attempted to read data from the remote interface Query DEADLOCKED A command was received which generates too much data to fit in the output buffer and the input buffer is also full Command execution continues but all data is lost Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response The IDN command must be the last query command within a command string The IDN command returns an indefinite length string which cannot be combined with any other query command Example IDN STB Instrument Errors Number of SAV RCL out of range This error will occur if a number included in SAV or RCL is out of range Up to 50 instrument setups can be stored using Firmware REV 4 0 numbered 1 to 50 Up to 10 setups can be stored using Firmware REV 1 0 2 0 3 0 numbered 1 to 10 Examples SAV 52 or RCL 0 Unable to recall scan is running Unable to recall memory is empty Unable to recall modules were changed Before recalling a stored channel setup the instrument verifies the same module types are installed in each slot This error indicates that the instrument has detected one or more modules have been replaced with other module types or have
45. 65 description 239 relay type 65 simplified schematic 239 specifications 335 wiring 240 241 44472A module BNC connector 243 channel numbering 72 description 63 242 relay type 63 simplified schematic 243 specifications 337 338 wiring 244 44473A module channel numbering 73 description 66 245 relay type 66 simplified schematic 246 specifications 339 wiring 247 44474A module channel numbering 73 description 67 248 simplified schematic 249 specifications 341 wiring 250 44475A module channel numbering 73 description 65 251 hardware assembly 254 simplified schematic 253 specifications 342 wiring 254 44476A module channel numbering 73 description 65 257 relay type 65 specifications 344 44476B module channel numbering 73 description 65 260 mounting microwave switches 264 specifications 344 44477A module channel numbering 73 description 65 265 relay type 65 simplified schematic 265 specifications 345 44478A module cabling considerations 271 channel numbering 73 description 63 267 relay type 63 simplified schematic 269 SMB connector 270 specifications 347 wiring 270 349 44478B module cabling considerations 271 channel numbering 73 description 63 relay type 63 SMB connector 270 4448x Screw Terminal Blocks 287 4448X Screw Terminal Connector Blocks 285 4 wire mode 178 A ABORt 92 138 aborting scan 92 address GPIB IEEE 488 47 Addressing channels 19 Agilent contacting 8 phone 8 Agil
46. Attenuator Module 217 N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module 221 N2280A Quadruple 1 to 2 Optical Switch Module 225 N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module 226 N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module 228 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module 230 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module 233 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module 236 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module 239 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module 242 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module 245 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module 248 44475A Breadboard Module 251 44476A Microwave Switch Module 257 44476B Microwave Switch Module 260 44477A Form C Relay Module 265 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules 267 Protection Networks 272 Terminals and Connections Information 275 U9 U09 Chapter 8 Application Programs 289 Visual C Example Program 291 Visual BASIC Example Program 293 VB net Example Program 296 BASIC Example Program 298 11 oy e Contents Chapter 9 Specifications 299 3499A B C Mainframe 301 N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module 303 N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module 305 N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module 307 N2263A 32 bit Digital I O Module 309 N2264A Multifunction Module 310 N2265A Multifunction Module 313 N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module 315 N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module 317 N2268A 509 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module 319 N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module 321 N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module 323 N2276A Du
47. BREADBOARD 44475 44476A B GP RELAY 44471 44477A GP RELAY 44471 44478A B VHF SW 44472 a Both the 44470A D return RELAY MUX 44470 You must physically check the module to determine which one is present b All the 44471A D 44476A B and 44477A return GP RELAY 44471 To determine if the module is an 44471A D 44476A B or 44477A check the switching channels For 44471A D and 44476A B you must physically check the modules to determine which one is present c Both the 44478A B return VHF SW 44472 You must physically check the module to determine which one is present 154 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference System Information Commands DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes lt channel list gt RELay CYCLes MAX lt slot gt RELay CYCLes CLEar lt channel list gt The switching plug in modules count the number of cycles on each relay on the module and store this total count in non volatile memory on each switch module Use this feature to track relay failures and predict system maintenance requirements This feature is supported by the Agilent N2260A N2261A N2262A N2264A N2265A N2266A N2267A N2268A N2270A N2272A N2276A and N2280A 81A 82A modules The channel_list parameter has the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number The actual channel numbers are module dependent Channel number for plug in modules are listed on page 70 The parameter can contain one or more
48. CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 12 Terminal Terminal or maximum Voltage Terminal Chassis 200 V dc or ac rms Maximum Current Per Channel 1 A dc or ac rms Maximum Power Per Channel 60 W dc 62 5 VA ac Thermal Offset Per Channel lt 3 nV Initial Closed Channel lt 050 Resistance Relay Life haa o o y oe Maximum Scan Rate 80 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION with terminal block Open Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 1010 Q Channel Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 109 with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 1009 with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 109 E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE without terminal block Capacitance Open Channel Channel Channel lt 10 pF with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 20 pF Insertion Loss Mites H x E with 509 termination 10 MHz lt 0 50 dB 100 kHz lt 70 dB Crosstalk and 1 MHz lt 50 dB with 509 termination 10 MHz lt 30 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 311 Chapter 9 Specifications N2264A Multifunction Module High Current GP Relay Function E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 3 Terminal Terminal or 125 V dc or 200 V ac rms Maximum Voltage Terminal Chassis Max
49. Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure for External Trigger 4 Turn the knob to select the slot for the external trigger Slot 0 control module is the built in external trigger available at the rear panel mini DIN connector see page 7 If a 44474A is not installed only slot 0 will be shown Press Enter The display shows the current setting for the external trigger DISABLE 5 Turn the knob to show the alternate choice WO ENABLE Press Enter to accept the choice and return to the first level menu D CONF EXT TRIG Press the Menu key to exit the menu The CONFIG annunciator turns off J 43 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure the Power on State To Configure the Power on State Firmware Rev 4 0 ONLY To read your firmware version see the procedure on page 52 For more information about firmware revisions see Firmware and Control Module Description on page 59 An instrument with Firmware REV 4 0 or later can be set to power on to the reset state see Factory Default and Reset States on page 74 or toa state previously stored in a specified memory location The instrument will return to the specified state the next time it is turned on 1 Press the Menu key The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the display shows the first menu level CARD PAIR 2 Turn the knob until POWER ON SET is displayed POWER ON SET
50. NO normally open and or NC normally closed contacts to the 5V power supply Also there are mounting holes JM921 and JM922 at the 5V supply for the addition of a protection resistor or inductor if the internal supply is to be used If the internal supply is not used an external power supply can be applied through the screw terminal block via the H terminal The addition of pull up resistors can be useful when driving logic circuits where the common C terminal is connected to ground and used to pull either the NO or the NC line low 265 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44477A Form C Relay Module 44477A FORM C RELAYS TERMINAL BLOCK g 901 j S O i K901 i c CHOO JM902 ae a O oO a gt CJ l g 993 s a 1 O 1 K902 CHO1 JM904 a gt i e oO oO 4 gt i cj b 3 10 A 5 5 K903 c CHO2 JM906 Ae gt O Oo 4 gt i cJ ong gt 0 1 O i K904 i Cc CHO3 JM908 a gt O oO 4 gt i CJ 4 g 903 g xi NO 90517 S CHO4 JM910 a Oo Oo gt c ee S K906 al CHO5 JM912 ae O oO gt i CJ 2 1 0 1 K907 ij CHO6 JM914 A i to o gt c JM922 JM921 l 5V O O O O e gt H 44477A Wiring Information Use the Agilent 44487A Terminal Block to make connections to the 44477A One 44487A is suppl
51. Not used Not used ROW3_L f 31 O PCTL PFLG 16 Not used Not used ROW3_H f 32 GND GND GND 199 Caution Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module The Agilent N2266A is a configurable multiplexer MUX module It contains 40 2 wire non latching relays for switching and two non latching tree relays for configuration applications The N2266A can be configured as an 80 channel 1 wire multiplexer a 40 channel 2 wire multiplexer default two independent 20 channel 2 wire multiplexer or a 20 channel 4 wire multiplexer These modes can be selected from the front panel or with a SCPI command see page 83 An instrument power on or reset will set the N2266A to its default configuration as a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module When instrument power is removed all relays will open on the multiplexer The N2266A can be operated in either SCPI mode or 3488A mode but configuration is only possible in the SCPI mode In 3488A mode the N2266A can only be used as a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module A parallel switching feature makes the N2266A well suited for high speed switching The 40 2 wire relays on the N2266A can be separated into four groups and up to 10 relays in the same group can be closed simultaneously parallel switching The groups are group 1 channel 00 through channel 09 group 2 channel 10 through channel 19 group 3 channel 20 through c
52. O O O O O O O N2282A 1X8 OPTICAL SWITCH Note The Agilent N2282A module extends an additional 8 5 cm beyond the rear panel of the 3499A B C mainframe 229 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module The Agilent 44470A Relay Multiplexer MUX provides 10 2 wire channels latching relays to switch both Hi H and Lo L input signal lines to a common bus Relays on this module are rated at a maximum voltage of 250 volts with a maximum current of 2 amps dc or ac rms The module exhibits low thermal offset characteristics making it ideal for precision low level measurements However since no thermocouple compensation is included temperature measurement errors may occur if you use this module to switch thermocouples The 44470A can be operated in either of two modes single channel break before make BBM or multiple channels closed at the same time Specifications for the 44470A are given on page 329 44470A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic of the 44470A is shown below The 44470A consists of 10 2 wire relay channels that may be connected to a common bus Channels on the 44470A are numbered as 00 through 09 CH00 through CH09 230 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module BAe ore ane eae Oe es eee eae ene 44470A Relay MUX Terminal Block Pb Ly SH_CHO9 7 CHO LT T nn gt CHO8 l oT ol a l Jr H _C
53. Panel Operation chapter on page 27 For more information about programming the instrument refer to the Remote Interface Reference chapter on page 113 Channel Addressing A channel refers to an individual relay on a switching module or an individual bit port on a digital I O module The channel address is in the form of snn where s represents slot number and nn represents a channel number For all mainframes slot 0 refers to the 3499 controller board Valid slot numbers are 3499A slots 0 through 5 3499B slots 0 through 2 3499C slots 0 through 9 The channel number nn is plug in module dependent For additional information about channel numbers of individual plug in modules refer to the table beginning on page 70 19 Chapter 1 Quick Start Basic Operation To Select a Slot and Channel When the instrument is first turned on the display shows the model number and the slot number of the controller board 3499 0 Use the knob to select a channel on the active slot For example with the display shown above turning the knob to the right will select the first of the individual built in digital I O ports DIN 090 The DIN indicates the port is set for a digital input operation As the knob is turned the additional ports are displayed followed by any installed plug in modules If you have installed one or more plug in modules you can select the module by pressing the
54. Press the Shift key and then the S List key The display will briefly show CLR SCAN LIST 101 and then return to normal operation 39 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation Scanning Operation To View a Sean List You can view which channels are included in a scan list This example assumes that channels 103 through 107 are included in the scan list 1 Press the View key The VIEW annunciator lights up and the display shows the first level menu ERROR 101 Turn the knob until SCAN LIST is displayed SCAN LIST 101 3 Press Enter The first channel in the scan list is displayed on the channel area N 001 OF 005 103 Turn the knob to view other channels in the scan list 002 OF 005 104 4 Press Enter to return to the first level of the View menu J SCAN LIST 107 Press View again to exit the View menu The VIEW annunciator turns off oO 40 OU OHE Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Pair Two Modules Together To Pair Two Modules Together You can pair two modules together so that they operate as a single unit The two modules to be paired must be identical that is they must have the same model number and be installed in the same mainframe When two modules are paired together any operation on a channel of one module will be duplicated on the corresponding channel of the other module The example below pairs
55. RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 90 Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH S109 with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 1092 315 Chapter 9 Specifications N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module E AC CHARACTERISTICS Bandwidth 3dB 40 MHz Capacitance Open Channel Channel Channel lt 7 pF with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 140 pF 2 wire HI LO lt 50 pF 100 kHz 0 2 dB Insertion Loss 1 MHz 0 3 dB with 50Q termination 10 MHz 2 0 dB 40 MHz 3 0 dB 3 100 kHz 75 dB shana rmination 1 Mkz 55 dB Y emination Iiz 33 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with the Lo Terminal of the input connected to the Lo Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels Caution In order to stay within the 20W power limit set for convection cooling no more than three 3 N2266A 40 Channel MUX Modules should be installed in an Agilent 3499A mainframe the remaining two slots must remain empty Other module combinations are acceptable for example two N2266A MUX modules plus any combination of other Agilent modules is permissible This limitation does not apply to the 3499B or 3499C mainframes 316 Chapter 9 Specifications N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module E INPUT CHARACTER ISTICS Total Channels 8 Maximum Switchin
56. Row1 CH2_H CH3_H CH4_H Not Used CH5_H CH6_H CH7_H Row2 CH2_L CH3_L CH4_L Not Used CH5_L CH6_L CH7_L Row3 CHO_H CH1_H Not Used COM_H_ Not Used CH8_H CH9_H Row4 CHO_L CH1_L Not Used COM_L Not Used CH8_L CH9_L 213 Note Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module The Agilent N2272A is a 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 Multiplexer well suited for use in RF test and measurement applications Seven channels are standard branch channels One channel CH08 has smaller insertion loss and lower VSWR and can be used either as standard branch channel or an auxiliary channel Using the auxiliary channel CH08 multiple N2272A modules can be cascaded to form larger RF multiplexers while minimizing performance degradation For example by connecting CH08 to the COM of a second N2272A a 17 1 multiplexer can be configured Adding another N2272A to channel 8 of the second N2272A allows a 25 1 multiplexer to be configured and so on Only one channel can be closed at a time The Agilent N2272A does not support the OPEN command one channel must always be closed Closing a channel opens any other closed channel The Agilent N2272A can only be used with the SCPI Mode of 3499 Firmware Revision 3 0 or later See page 59 for details about the firmware revisions Specifications for the N2272A are given on page 3238 214 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2272A 1 GHz RF 1
57. The N2282A does not support the OPEN command Closing a channel will open any previously closed channels A special virtual channel is included that allows all channels in the switch to be opened Channels are numbered as CH00 through CH08 CH00 through CH07 are standard channels CH08 is a special channel used when programming to open all other channels CH00 through CH07 The latching characteristic of the optical switch makes it hold its most recently state after powered off Specifications for the N2282A are given on page 328 The Agilent N2282A can only be used with the SCPI Mode of 3499 Firmware Revision 3 0 or later See page 59 for details about the firmware revisions N2282A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown on the next page The N2282A consists of one 1 to 8 optical switch whose channels are numbered as CH00 through CHO7 and a special channel CH08 with no external connection 228 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module CHO00 through CH07 are opened when a ROUTe CLOSe x08 command is sent where x is the slot number containing the N2282A o Ch00 o Ch01 o Ch02 o Ch03 COM o Ch04 o Ch05 o Ch06 Ch07 N2282A Wiring Information Use SC APC connectors for wiring external optical signals to the N2282A module The rear panel is shown below ye Agilent 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 COM i O O O Q O O O O O O O
58. Visual C 6 0 and has been tested on a PC running WIN95 NT The example uses the SCPI commands As the example is currently written the program requirements are GPIB interface selected and set to the address of 09 from the front panel Any one of the relay modules installed in Slot 1 of the mainframe A GPIB interface card installed in your PC with the VISA library To program a 3499A B C using the RS 232 interface you will need to modify the code at the top of the program Change the line define USING_RS232 0to define USING_RS232 1 On the 3499A B C select the RS 232 interface and set its parameters to BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY NONE 8 BITS and FLOW FLOW NONE A GPIB card in your PC is not necessary if you are using RS 2382 include lt stdio h gt include lt windows h gt include visa h define USING _RS232 0 Change 0 to 1 if RS 232 interface is to be used if USING RS232 define INST_ADDR ASRL1 INSTR 3499A B C RS 232 address else define INST _ADDR GPIBO 9 INSTR 3499A B C GPIB address endif ste Hh tHe tt tt void main ViSession drm Session to default resource manager ViSession vi Session to instrument ViStatus status VISA function status return code char retStr 128 String returned from the instrument Open the default resource manager status viOpenDefaultRM amp drm if status lt VI_SUCCESS printf VISA ERROR viOpenDefau
59. a mixture of upper and lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability you may send the entire command The instrument will accept either the abbreviated or the entire command For example if the command syntax shows CHANnel then CHAN and CHANNEL are both acceptable forms Other forms of CHANne1 such as CHANN or CHANNE will generate an error You may use upper or lower case letters Therefore CHANNEL channel and ChAnNelL are all acceptable Implied Commands Implied commands are those which appear in square brackets in the command syntax Note that the brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the instrument Suppose you send a second level command but do not send the preceding implied command In this case the instrument assumes you intend to use the implied command and it responds as if you had sent it Examine the partial ROUTe subsystem shown below ROUTe CLOSe lt channel_ list gt CLOSe lt channel_list gt SCAN lt scan_list gt LIST SIZE The root command ROUTe is an implied command To close relays in a channel list you can send either of the following command statements ROUT CLOS 100 107 201 205 or CLOS 100 107 201 205 These commands function the same closing Channels 0 through 7 in Slot 1 and Channels 1 and 5 in Slot 2 162 Ch
60. an operating proce dure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury or death Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating proce dure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to the product or loss of important data Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Earth ground symbol Chassis ground symbol WARNING Only qualified service trained person nel who are aware of the hazards involved should remove the cover from the instrument WARNING For continued protection against fire replace the line fuse only with a fuse of the specified type and rating User s Guide Publication Number 03499 90017 Revision A September 1999 Revision B April 2000 Revision C April 2002 Revision D November 2002 Revision E March 2009 Revision F October 2012 Copyright Agilent Technologies Inc 1999 2012 Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System Agilent 3499A B C at a Glance The Agilent Technologies 3499A B C Switch Control System provides a convenient mechanical and programming environment for a variety of plug in modules With appropriate plug in modules the Switch Control System provides high density
61. during an input operation This means that if a port is written to and then read from the data read will be that which was just written to it It is possible however that external devices might load the lines and cause a false read Timing for the I O direction line is as shown in Mode 1 for write operations For read operations the I O direction line does not change 99 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Read or Write and Strobe Mode 3 In this mode the I O direction line is still used to indicate direction of transfer input or output but the PCTL Peripheral control line is used to strobe the data During a write operation where the 3499A B C writes the data to some external device the strobe pulse signifies that the data on the 16 or 32 data I O lines is valid This is shown in the following timing diagram DATA LINES PS SS SS S X_DATA VALID t1 Time from I O line Write Operation ee os Be ea ences VO DIRECTION __ _ _ t2 Time from output enable to start of strobe 25 us STROBE PCTL LINE minimum 1 t2 Kel t3 Strobe pulse width t ims 25us 20s 20 us minimum A Strobe pulse signifies that the data on the data lines is valid During a write operation the device receiving the data is triggered by the strobe The Strobe pulse is used during a read operation to signify that the 3499A B C has completed the read operation This is shown in the following diagram
62. e O o e m o e 3 z es Z e 6 6 se o o e Se e ees 14 96 pin male DIN connector on the plug in module 96 pin female DIN connector on the DIN to D cable 3231 302928 27 262524 232221 20191817 1615 14131211 10 9876543 21 ooooo0o0o00000000000000000000000 oooo0o000000000000000000000000 c o0000000000000000000000000000 3231 302928 27 262524 232221 20191817 16 15 14131211 10 987654321 CONNECTOR 3 CONNECTOR 4 c B A A B CONNECTOR 1 CONNECTOR 2 CONNECTOR 3 CONNECTOR 4 vs 96 PIN DIN vs 96 PIN DIN vs 96 PIN DIN vs 96 PIN DIN SUB D DIN SUB D DIN SUB D DIN SUB D DIN 1 A1 1 AQ a A17 1 A25 2 B1 2 Bo 2 B17 2 B25 3 C1 3 c9 3 C17 3 C25 4 A3 4 At 4 A19 4 A27 5 B3 5 Bi 5 B19 5 B27 6 c3 6 cn 6 c19 6 c27 7 A5 7 A13 7 A21 7 A29 8 B5 8 B13 8 B21 8 B29 9 cs 9 C13 9 C21 9 C29 10 A7 10 AIS 10 A23 10 A31 11 B7 11 B15 11 B23 11 B31 12 c7 12 c15 12 C23 12 c31 13 13 i 13 13 14 A2 14 A10 14 A18 14 A26 15 B2 15 B10 15 B18 15 B26 16 c2 16 C10 16 C18 16 C26 17 A4 17 A12 17 A20 17 A28 18 B4 18 B12 18 B20 18 B28 19 C4 19 C12 19 C20 19 C28 20 A6 20 A14 20 A22 20 A30 21 B6 21 B14 21 B22 21 B30 22 ce 22 C14 22 c22 22 C30 23 A8 23 A16 23 A24 23 A32 24 B8 24 B16 24 B24 24 B32 25 ce 25 C16 25 C24 25 c32 Note A indicates the pin is not used 281 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Informa
63. for 23 1 are returned as negative numbers These values are in 2 s complement form 104 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Digital Output Operation From the front panel you can write data to the built in digital I O bits port numbered 090 through 094 or any one of the 8 bit ports on a digital I O module or multifunction module From the remote interface you can write data to individual bit channels and 8 16 or 32 bit ports on a digital I O module or multifunction module as well as to the built in digital I O bits port numbered 090 through 094 Instrument reset will set all digital I O ports in the instrument as input ports Pressing Card Reset or issuing a SYST CPON command will set all ports on the specified module as input ports ports on other modules are not affected Front Panel Operation Select an 8 bit port press Write the data from the last operation read or write will be displayed Edit the data to the desired value and press Enter to write the data to the port To cancel the write operation press Write again instead of Enter You can edit the data in either binary or decimal form see page 34 Remote Interface Operation The following commands write an individual bit SOURce DIGital DATA BIT 409 1 Write 1 to bit channel 409 SOURce DIGital DATA BIT 409 0 Write 0 to bit channel 409 The following commands write date to 8 16 and 32 bit ports SOURCE D
64. gt lt sys_mem_name gt SENSe DIGital TRACE DATA lt sys_mem_name gt 124 State Storage Commands Status System Commands System Information Commands Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped see page 147 for more information SAV lt mem gt RCL lt mem gt SYSTem STATe DELete lt mem gt ALL see page 148 for more information CLS ESE lt value gt ESE SRE lt value gt SRE STB STATus OPERation CONDition OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt OPERation ENABle OPERation EVENt PRESet see page 158 for more information IDN SYSTem CTYPE lt slot gt ERROr VERSion DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes lt channel_list gt RELay CYCLes MAX lt slot gt RELay CYCLes CLEar lt channel_list gt 125 System Level Control Commands RS 232 Commands Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped see page 156 for more information OPC OPC RST TST WAI SYSTem CPON lt slot ALL gt DIAGnostic DISPlay INFOrmation lt message gt DISPlay STATe lt 0 1 OFF ON gt DISPlay STATe MONitor lt slot gt lt channel gt lt port gt 1 MONitor SYSMODE lt 0 1 SCPI HP3488 gt SYSMODE see page 160 for more information SYSTem LOCal REMote RWLock 126 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Sw
65. on some plug in modules This feature can be very useful in switching systems to track relay failures and predict system maintenance requirements This feature is supported by the Agilent N2260A N2261A N2262A N2264A N2265A N2266A N2267A N2268A N2270A N2272A N2276A and N2280A 81A 82A modules The cycle counts of the tree relays s98 amp s99 on an N2260A or N2266A can also be queried Front Panel Operation Press View use the knob to select RELAY CYCLES and press Enter Turn the knob to select the relay channel of interest The display shows the channel cycle count Remote Interface Operation Integer values are returned to indicate the cycle count If you request more than one value the integers are returned as comma separated values in the same order as the channel in the query command DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes 101 Query relay cycle count of channel 101 DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes 101 112 Query the relay cycle count of the range of channels from 101 to 112 You can also query for the maximum relay count on a module The returned value is the highest count on a module but you cannot determine which relay the count applies to with this command DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes MAX 1 Query the maximum relay cycle count of the module in slot 1 111 Note To Select the System Mode The instrument can be operated in either SCPI mode or 3488A mode except Firmware REV
66. pairing ROUTe CPAir 4 Read and write If you set a port to this mode you cannot use strobe the port in a scan list or use card pairing ROUTe CPAir 5 Full handshake If you set a port to this mode you cannot use the port in a scan list or use card pairing ROUTe CPAir 98 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Static Mode 1 Static Mode 1 is the default mode In this mode data is transferred statically there is no read or write strobe pulses or handshaking The I O Direction line is active and indicates direction of transfer This is shown in the following timing diagrams DATA LINES ASS ZZ _X_DATA VALID l t1 T O input to data l valid Ims minimum l Write Operation CLOSE DWRITE etc VO DIRECTION _ k ti gt 1ms Approximately 1 ms after the I O direction line goes to a low state the digital I O module takes control of the data lines DATA LINES SJZ SIZZ DATA VALID Read Operation DREAD etc t1 Data bus floated I O DIRECTION to UO input 100 us minimum lt gt t2 I O input to data i t2 latched 150 us 100us 150us minimum 100 us after the 3499A B C is instructed to read the data lines it releases control of the lines and the I O direction line goes to a high state 150 us later the data is actually read latched Static Mode 2 Static Mode 2 acts just like Mode 1 except the output lines are not disabled
67. plug in module wiring information for details about the terminal block The figures below shows the basic steps to wire and assemble this type of terminal 1 Remove cover 2 Determine the wires amp the wire exit oe Hk A The wire gauge 18 26 AWG lease screw on top of the cover t B ress tab towan and releass B Wires connected to P101 amp P102 exit from EXIT 1 C Wires connected to P103 amp P104 exit from EXIT 2 3 Attach wires 4 place cover A Insert wire into terminal connectors A Hookthe top cover tabs onto the fixture B Tighten screws on the connectors B Press down and tighten screw C Tighten wraps to secure wires _ Tighten wrapsto A secure wires 287 288 Application Programs B Note Application Programs This chapter provides example programs in Visual C Visual BASIC and BASIC to help you develop programs for your specific application Chapter contents include Visual C Example Program on page 291 Visual BASIC Example Program on page 293 VB net Example Program on page 296 BASIC Example Program on page 298 For the example programs provided in this chapter to run properly make sure that your system has been properly setup according to the requirements of the individual example 290 Chapter 8 Application Programs Visual C Example Program Visual C Example Program This example program is written in
68. returns a decimal weighted value indicating the currently set bits in this register 152 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference System Information Commands System Information Commands These commands are used to obtain system level information IDN This IEEE488 2 Common Command queries the instrument for the identification string The returned string will contain the manufacturer identification the model number the serial number and the firmware revision SYSTem ERRor This query returns a variant of the instrument s error queue Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error stored See the Error Messages chapter on page 165 for the error numbers and messages Depending upon your programming environment this query may return an integer containing the error number or a variant containing the error number and error message When all the errors from the queue are read the errors are cleared and the ERROR annunciator turns off When the queue is empty each following SYSTem ERRor query returns 0 No error To clear all error numbers messages in the queue execute the CLS command or power on the instrument The queue holds a maximum of 10 error number message pairs If the queue overflows the last error number message in the queue is replaced by 350 Queue overflow The least recent error numbers messages remain in the queue and the most
69. specifications 325 wiring 220 N2276A B module channel numbering 72 description 63 relay type 63 simplified schematic 218 wiring 224 N2276B module channel numbering 72 configuration 223 description 221 specifications 325 N2280A module channel numbering 72 description 69 225 relay type 69 simplified schematic 225 specifications 326 wiring 225 N2281A module channel numbering 72 description 69 226 relay type 69 simplified schematic 226 specifications 327 wiring information 227 N2282A module channel numbering 72 description 69 228 relay type 69 simplified schematic 228 Specifications 328 wiring 229 N2296A Insulation Displacement Connector 278 N2297A DIN9Q6 to twin D50 Cable 279 N2298A DIN96 to D25 cable 280 N2299A DIN96 to D25 cable 281 N2320A Crimp and Insert Terminal Block 283 non latching relay N2264A module 192 O open close relay channel 82 Optical modules general information 69 P pair modules 41 parallel operation 58 parallel switching 84 plug in modules classification 61 overview 61 pairing 41 removal 17 screw terminal blocks 275 wiring information 275 plug in modules information 44470A module 230 44470D module 233 44471A module 236 44471D module 239 44472A module 242 44473A module 245 44474A module 248 44475A module 251 44476A B module 257 44476B module 260 44477A module 265 44478A B module 267 N2260A module 176 N2261A module 182 N2262A module 185 N2263A module 188
70. the controller module can be monitored either individually as bit channels numbered 091 through 094 or as a 4 bit port numbered 090 However the individual bit channels on a digital I O or multifunction module with a DIO function cannot be monitored 29 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Monitor a Channel or a Slot Display Description The display for a multiplexer or a GP relay module This display indicates that the monitored module is in Slot 2 and channels 10 16 and 19 are closed ROW 3 1 3 6 7 0 3 COL 3 The display for a matrix module The top is the row information indicating that the relays on Row 3 Columns 1 3 6 and 7 of the module in Slot 3 are closed The lower display is the column information indicating that relays on column 3 row 0 and 3 are closed 00 H255 L254 The display for a digital I O module The first 2 digits on the left 00 in this case represents the L 8 bit port address Adding one to this value the H 8 bit port address is obtained Data with a trailing decimal point indicates that the last operation on that port was a WRITE data without a trailing decimal point indicates that the last operation on that port was a READ This display shows that the data last read from Port 401 is 255 and the data last written to Port 400 is 254 DIO 12 090 DOUT 0 091 The top display is for the bu
71. the first N2272A and channel 08 through 15 are on the second N2272A Switch the first N2272A COM to AUX 08 to access the second bank of multiplexer channels Additional multiplexers can be added as necessary COM ait of chained N2272As weer EOR OaE To next N2272A s COM Channel if needed You can also connect multiple N2272A s in a tree structure to implement high channel count multiplexers however this configuration will cause signal delays COM aah i of tree combined N2272As SOOO O OO HANA DO OD OOD eI IO OD OO NAAMA AF MU O m o o auxos pom os 5 w OGOOGO OOOO KANA RE MUX 216 Note Caution Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module The Agilent 2276A contains microwave switch and attenuator driver circuits The microwave switches or attenuators can be mounted to the rear panel of the module or connected with an auxiliary cable for convenience Several microwave switches and attenuators are available for use with the module The N2276A is preconfigured in one of two options Option Configuration Switches Used 204 Dual 1 to 4 up to 20 GHz 87104B 206 default Dual 1 to 6 up to 20 GHz 87106B The N2276A is a three slot module and cannot be used in the 3499B two slot mainframe Due to the drive circuitry each N2276A cause
72. to 9 MUX Module N2272A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The N2272A consists of series of latching RF relays arranged in a tree structure One common channel COM and nine branch channels numbered as CH00 through CH08 are included in the N2272A CH08 is also called an auxiliary channel and can be used to expand channel count by connecting to another N2272A CH08 passes through only one relay and has a very short PC board trace to provide smaller insertion loss and lower VSWR than the other channels Only one channel can be closed at a time In addition to the channel relays you can also query the relay cycle count of the tree relays T96 T97 T98 and T99 O Ch00 T96 n Ch01 we ___ Cho2 T98 Cho3 in Cho4 T97 E Ch05 Ch06 Ch07 o AUX Ch08 COM N2272A Wiring Information The rear panel of the N2272A contains 10 female BNC connectors gt OOO 00 N2272A RF MUX 215 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module Connecting Multiple N2272A s The figure below illustrates how to connect two or more N2272A s together to form larger channel count multiplexers Additional N2272A s are added by connecting each COM to the low insertion loss low VSWR auxiliary channel on the first N2272A The example below shows a 1 to 16 multiplexer Channel 00 through 07 are on
73. to TIMER viPrintf vi ARM TIMER 1 n Interval time between two scan sweeps is 1 second viPrintf vi ARM COUNT 2 n Set scan sweep 2 times viPrintf vi TRIG SOURCE IMM n Set trigger source to IMM default viPrintf vi CHAN DELAY 0 100 103 n Set channel delay time to 0 default viPrintf vi INIT n Start the scan Set visa time out value to 10 seconds viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_TMO VALUE 10000 OPC command will wait until scan finishes status viQueryf vi OPC n St retStr printf Scan End n viClose vi Close session to 3499A B C viClose drm Close session to the resource manager 292 Chapter 8 Application Programs Visual BASIC Example Program Visual BASIC Example Program This example program is written in Visual BASIC 6 0 and has been tested on a PC running WIN95 NT The example uses the SCPI com mands As the example is currently written the program requirements are GPIB interface selected and set to the address of 09 from the front panel Any one of the relay modules installed in Slot 1 of the mainframe A GPIB interface card installed in your PC with the VISA library To program a 3499A B C using the RS 232 interface you will need to modify the code at the top of the program Change the line Const USING_RS232 0 to Const USING_RS232 1 On the 3499A B C select the RS 232 interface and set its p
74. to be considered First the total circuit capacitance C must be such that the peak voltage across the open relay contacts does not exceed 353 volts peak 250 V rms 353 Vp The equation for determining the minimum allowable circuit capacitance is C gt 10 353 24 Equation 4 where L the inductance of the load and Io is the value calculated in Equation 3 In reality the total circuit capacitance C is made up of the wiring capacitance plus the value of the protection network capacitor Cp Therefore the minimum value for C should be the value obtained for the total circuit capacitance C from Equation 4 Indeed the actual value used for C should be substantially greater than the value calculated for C 273 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Protection Networks For example we will determine the typical values for an RC protection network where the load is a small ac motor running on the 120 V ac line 170 V peak This motor draws a maximum of 2 amps Using Equation 1 we can find the minimum value for Ry R V lo 170 2 85 Q The maximum value for R would be equal to the load resistance or 400 Q Therefore any resistor preferably at least 1 watt between 85 and 400 Q will suffice To keep the peak contact voltage below 353V peak use equation 3 to determine Io Io V R1 170 400 0 425 A Now use equation 4 to determine C C gt 10 353 7 0 425 353 20 0 144 uF Since R can vary between 85
75. wait for a TRIGger IMMediate command before proceeding 87 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning Trigger Layer In trigger layer the instrument requires a trigger source to open the previous channel and then close the next one listed in the scan list You can use one of the following trigger sources TIMER with timer trigger source selected the scan list advances when the specified time interval has elapsed IMM with IMM default trigger source selected the scan list advances as soon as the previous channel is opened BUS with bus trigger source selected the scan list advances when a GET or a TRG command is received or Step on the front panel is pressed EXT with external EXT trigger source selected the scan list advances when an external trigger is received from the specified trigger in line MIX with mix trigger source selected the scan list advances when a BUS event or EXTernal event occurs HOLD with hold trigger source selected the scan list advances when a TRIGger IMMediate command is received 88 Note Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning Creating a Scan List Before initiating a scan a scan list must be set up The instrument scans the specified channels automatically in the same order of the scan list The scan list is automatically cleared whenever the instrument is turned off or reset You can also clear the scan list by pressing Shift S Li
76. 0 N2280A Optical Switch Quad 1 to 2 MUX Module s00 s01 s10 s11 s20 s21 30 s31 N2281A Optical Switch Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module s00 s01 s02 s03 s10 11 12 13 N2282A Optical Switch 1 to 8 MUX Module s00 s01 s02 SO7 4 Bit Built in Digital I O slot 0 control module Individual Bits 097 092 093 094 4 Bit Port 090 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module s00 s01 s02 s03 s08 s09 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module s00 s01 s02 s03 18 s19 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module s00 s01 s02 s03 s08 s09 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module s00 s01 s02 s03 18 s19 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Module Group 0 s00 s01 s02 s03 Group 1 s10 s11 s12 s13 72 Chapter 3 System Overview Channel and Slot Addressing Plug in Module Channel Addressing snn s Slot Number nn Channel Number 44473A 4x4 Matrix Module Row 0 1 2 3 Column 0 1 2 3 s00 s01 s02 s03 s10 s11 12 13 820 21 S22 S23 830 31 S32 533 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module Individual Bits s00 s01 s02 14 s15 8 Bit Ports s00 s01 16 Bit Port s00 44475A N A Breadboard Module 44476A s00 s01 s02 3 Channel 13 GHz Microwave Switch Module 44476B s00 s01 2 Channel 26 GHz Microwave Switch Module 44477A 7 Channel Form C Relay Module s00 s01 s02 s03 s04 s05 s06 44478A 50 Q 1 3 GHz MUX
77. 0 and 3 0 Stored states are preserved when power is removed for firmware revision 4 0 Firmware revision 4 0 allows you store a state and apply that state when power is applied to the instrument Storage memory locations are numbered 01 to 10 for Firmware revision 2 0 and 3 0 Memory locations are number 01 to 50 for Firmware revision 4 0 Before recalling a stored setup the instrument verifies that all module types and slot assignment match the setup If a mismatch is detected an error RECALL FAILED will occur 106 Note Chapter 4 Features and Functions State Storage Firmware Revision Differences continued An instrument reset does not affect the stored instrument setup information All stored setups will be cleared if the system mode is changed for example to 3488A mode Firmware revision 3 0 allows instrument operation in either SCPI or 3488 mode not both The mode is selected when the firmware is loaded To Store an Instrument State Firmware revision 2 0 and 3 0 allow up to 10 stored states Firmware revision 4 0 allows up to 50 stored states Set the instrument to the state you want to store Front Panel Operation To store an instrument setup press Shift Recall select a memory location and press Enter To cancel the store operation press Recall again instead of Enter Remote Interface Operation SAV 1 Store an instrument setup in memory location 1 Approximately 1 second is re
78. 0 5 watt resistor can be installed in the R2 shunt location and the resultant voltage drop transducer current through the resistor measured The 50 Q resistor converts the 4 20 mA current to an 0 2 1 volt signal No series element R1 is needed 44470A Wiring Information Use the Agilent 44480A Terminal Block to make connections to the 44470A One 44480A is supplied with the module The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external wiring to the 44470A The screw terminal is shown below Additional information about the terminal block is given on page 285 Channels 7 Common 7 m Channels 44470A RELAY MULTIPLEXER 250V MAX 232 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module The Agilent 44470D Relay MUX Module provides 20 2 wire channels latching relays to switch both High H and Low L input signals to a common bus The individual relays on this module are rated at a maximum voltage of 250 volts with a maximum current of 2 amps dc or ac rms The module exhibits low thermal offset characteristics making it ideal for precision low level measurements However since no thermocouple compensation is included temperature measurement errors may occur if you use this module to switch thermocouples The 44470D can be operated in one of two modes single channel break before make BBM or multiple channels closed at the same time Specifications for the 44470
79. 0 volts dc or ac rms Maximum current per relay is 1 amp dc or ac rms and maximum power per relay is 60 watts dc or 125 VA ac Maximum closed channel resistance is less than 2 Specifications for the 44471D are given on page 335 44471D Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The 44471D GP Relay Module consists of 20 independent SPST Single Pole Single Through relays Channels are numbered as 00 through 19 CH00 through CH19 44471D GP Relays Terminal Block 55 gt o L H CH19 I o as eae L i L eae Se K o chia C01 ae 22 CHo 239 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module 44471D Wiring Information Use the Agilent 44481B Terminal Block to make connections to the 44471D One 44481B is supplied with the module The terminal block connectors are shown below Additional information about the terminal block is given on page 287 HN m CHI5T CH16 7 CH17 7 CHI87CHI9 WH L mali mali H L ale M A he v r i coocoooo0oocoo0o00000 OOS l iii LIO Mae ale wit wie nl G 9SOGD0DOODODDOO DO KO O TEE 0ld oocooo0oo0oo0o000000 il fee Label any conta i ePGD0ODDGDOHODODSO L Hye HL ne nje j CHOO CHO 1 CHO2 CH0O3 CH04 TOld LO6f 0 p uuo9 LOLL
80. 04 M mainframes general description 58 Matrix modules general information 66 Menu key operation card pair 41 configure external trigger 42 configure power on state 44 configure remote interface 46 firmware revision query 52 perform self test 51 serial number query 53 system mode 112 Mini DIN 6 7 Mode 1 99 Mode 2 99 Mode 3 100 Mode 4 101 Mode 5 102 Mode key operation configure DIO module 33 configure DIO port 34 modules classification 61 installation 18 installation procedure 17 pairing 41 removal 17 screw terminal blocks 275 wiring information 275 modules information 44470A module 230 44470D module 233 44471A module 236 44471D module 239 44472A module 242 44473A module 245 44474A module 248 44475A module 251 44476A B module 257 44476B module 260 44477A module 265 44478A B module 267 N2260A module 176 N2261A module 182 N2262A module 185 N2263A module 188 N2264A module 192 N2265A module 196 N2266A module 200 N2267A module 206 N2268A module 210 N2270A module 212 N2272A module 214 N2276A B module 217 221 N2280A module 225 N2281A module 226 N2282A module 228 monitoring channel slot 29 80 mount 3499A 23 3499B 24 3499C 26 mount mainframe onto rack 23 Multifunction modules general information 68 MUX modules configuration 83 general information 61 N N2260A module channel numbering 70 configure function mode 83 default setting 83 95 description 176 descripton 62 exception 83 relay typ
81. 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules The 44478A B is shown below J905 aalaga ashes a beso ee c Raz ii onanan 268 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules 44478A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The two groups of 4 to 1 MUXs are specified as GROUP 00 and GROUP 10 They are isolated from each other Closing a channel closes a particular set of relays to connect the common BNC to one of the four BNC inputs Channels within each group are break before make and are numbered as 00 through 03 for GROUP 00 and 10 through 13 for GROUP 10 oo ie vale J101 3 E S cxo0 N Oon J102 3 2 BNC CONNECTOR SMB CONNECTOR Wi SIL 1H MW O COM00 GROUP 00 J104 V3 CHO2 H 6 cos J105 V3 3 J106 4 m oo Oon J107 4 NIL MM o O COM10 GROUP 10 J109 4 4 O pO 2 J110 Wa 4 TYPICAL CHANNEL RESISTIVE TERMINATIONS Q y R oe chxx tO FOR 44478A R 50Q OR 750 FOR 44478B R 75Q 269 Note Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules 44478A Wiring Information Ext
82. 1 4 dB Crosstalk DC 2 GHz 64 dB with 50Q termination 2 GHz 3 0 GHz 50 dB 1 GHz 1 20 VSWR 2 GHz 1 35 3 0 GHz 1 35 Gapacienes Center Shield 20 pF p i Center Center 0 06 pF Rise Time lt 150 ps Signal Delay lt 1 5 ns a With chassis of all instruments connected and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 320 Chapter 9 Specifications N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 10 Maximum Switching Terminal Terminal or 1000 V peak per IEC1010 for Voltage Terminal Chassis Pollution Degree Maximum Switching Per Channel 1A Current Per Module 1A eee _ Per Channel 10 W Maximum Switching Power Per Module iow Thermal Offset Per Channel 200 uV Initial Closed Channel lt 1Q Resistance Relay Life Signal load 1V 10mA 108 Maximum Scan Rate 100 Chans sec E DC CHARACTERISTICS Open Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 Q Channel Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 109 Q with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 Q lt 40 C 80 RH gt 109 Q with 1 channel closed 321 Chapter 9 Specifications N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module E AC CHARACTERISTICS Open Channel Channel Channel lt 7 pF Capacitanc
83. 2 includes the flange and filler panel Flange Filler Panel a ntiair P O O To Rack Mount a Single Agilent 3499B with Adapter kit 5183 7172 OR A Support Shelf part number 5063 9255 A slide kit part number 1494 0015 And a filler panel part number 5002 3999 To Rack Mount a Single Agilent 3499B on a support shelf 24 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Rack Mount the 3499A B C To rack mount two Agilent 3499B s side by side or any System II instrument next to an Agilent 3499B order A Support Shelf part number 5063 9255 Anda slide kit part number 1494 0015 To Rack Mount Two Agilent 3499B s Side by side 25 Chapter 1 Quick Start Filler Panels Agilent 3499C To rack mount an Agilent 3499C order either Adapter kit without handles part number 5063 9216 or Adapter kit with handles part number 5063 9223 Adapter kit To Rack Mount an Agilent 3499C Filler Panels Order filler panels to cover any unused slots in an Agilent 3499A B C 1 slot filler panel part number 03499 00023 option FP1 2 slot filler panel part number 03499 00024 option FP2 26 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Operation The Agilent 3499A B C m
84. 2 3499C slots 1 through 9 DIAG SPEEK returns a decimal number representing the binary weighted values of the bits in the register connected to the DI lines of the breadboard 4 is the register number Any other register number will not generate an error and will return the value 255 DIAG SPOKE writes a decimal number lt data gt representing the binary weighted values of the bits to the register connected to the DO lines of the breadboard 0 is the register number Any other register number will not generate an error but will have no effect In the form of the value returned or written as data a 1 represents a TTL high and a 0 represents a TTL low on the DI or DO line 131 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Scanning Commands Scanning Commands The Agilent 3499A B C can scan switching channels digital I O bit channels and even the stored channel setups in a scan list You can combine scanned channels with an external measurement device or source and synchronize the scan with the measurements To perform scanning you must 1 create a scan list 2 configure the scan 3 initiate the scan 4 trigger the arm layer 5 trigger the trigger layer The rules for scanning are described on page 85 Sean List Commands ROUTe SCAN LIST lt scan_list gt SCAN LIST SCAN CLEar SCAN SIZE The ROUTe SCAN LIST command creates a scan list A scan list can contain any combination of swit
85. 21 N2272A 323 N2276A 325 N2276B 325 N2280A 326 N2281A 327 N2282A 328 State Storage 60 and firmware revision 106 Static Mode 1 99 Static Mode 2 99 STATus OPERation CONDition 150 ENABIle 150 ENABle 150 EVENt 150 PRESet 150 store instrument state 106 Switch Control System features 2 mainframes description 58 plug in modules overview 61 switching relay channel 82 SYSMODE 159 SYSMODE 159 SYSTem CPON 157 CTYPE 153 ERRor 108 153 LOCal 160 REMote 160 RWLoc 160 STATe DELete 147 VERSion 153 system mode 3488A mode selection 112 general description 58 SCPI mode selection 112 T Telephone 8 terminal block 4448X 285 287 N229X 277 N2320A 283 TRIGger IMMediate 138 SOURce 135 SOURce 135 TIMer 136 TIMer 136 trigger layer 88 trigger source description 302 BUS 88 EXT 88 HOLD 88 IMM 88 MIX 88 TIMER 88 turn on instrument 29 turn on off display 110 y Varistors 274 VB net 296 VHF MUX module 242 view errors 36 108 View key operation view error 36 view scan list 40 view relay cycles 111 view scan list 40 Visual BASIC 293 Visual C 291 W wiring with screw terminal block 275 WORD 104 write to port 32 105 X XON XOFF 48 355 356 Declaration of Conformity Declarations of Conformity for this product and for other Agilent products may be downloaded from the Internet There are two methods to obtain the Declaration of Conformity Go to http regulations corporate agilen
86. 2260A 40 Channel MUX to provide a wide variety of switching combinations Specifications for the Agilent N2262A are given on page 307 N2262A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The N2262A contains 32 2 wire crosspoints organized in a 4 row by 8 column configuration Each crosspoint relay has a unique two digit channel number mn where m row number 0 3 and n column number 0 7 COLO COLI COL H 4 gt Z gt ROWO A Yi ooo VA T ROWL rA A ae r4 Channel 31 represents the relay E aay at the crosspoint of Row 3 27 A eT ROW3 and Column 1 COL1 B arr 4 Z Z Z T ROW3 rA mE a CHANNEL 31 ROW 3 COLUMN 1 185 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module N2262A Wiring Information There are three methods available to connect to the N2262A A screw terminal block the N2292A described on page 277 A direct wiring insulation displacement connector the N2296A described on page 278 A DIN96 to twin D25 Cable the N2298A described on page 280 The screw terminal block N2292A is shown below To use the other connection options you will need to use the pinout information on page 187 CONNECT TO P300 FOR 4X8 MATRIX _ a ee p U O i
87. 264A Multifunction Module N2264A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below There are three independent functions on the N2264A the 12 channel GP Relay CH00 11 the 3 channel High current GP Relay CH20 22 and the 16 bit Digital I O bits 30 45 Terminal Block o L A QO H n CHo aet i 1 H u ce E i ry e r Ld o ot i Ou H 5 Qu CH10 ot Qu H CH11 H 3 Channel High Current GP Relay Terminal Block ot Qi H CH20 H A i gt Qt CH21 H ot L H ona 2 16 Bit Digital I O Bits 30 45 OPEN COLLECTOR ONE I O LINE CURRENT SINK VMOS FET 1 5V 10K 5 CONNECTION i gt i DRIVER OUTPUT l Tai BLOCK 4 INPUT SENSE j REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 5V 5V i PCTL or I O i Handshake Signal oie 7 Resetable fuse HOR TERMINAL CONNECTION BLOCK zB i v vo PFLG Handshake Signal wy Ny 10K o sis T Resetable fuse H TERMINAL l gt CONNECTION j y BLOCK 4B i Vv V 193 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2264A Multifunction Module N2264A Wiring Information There are four methods available to connect to the N2264A A screw terminal block the N2294A described on page 277 A direct wiring insulation displacement connector the N2296A described on page 278 A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable the N2297A described on page 279 A DIN96 to four D25 Cable the N2299A described on
88. 29 Scanning Commands on page 132 Digital I O Commands on page 139 State Storage Commands on page 147 Status System Commands on page 148 System Information Commands on page 153 System Level Control Commands on page 156 RS 232 Commands on page 160 About the SCPI Language on page 161 114 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Syntax SCPI Command Syntax Throughout this manual the following conventions are used for SCPI command syntax for remote interface programming Square brackets indicate optional keywords or parameters Braces enclose parameter choices within a command string Angle brackets lt gt enclose parameters for which you must specify a value A vertical bar separates multiple parameters Rules for Using a Channel or Scan List Many of the SCPI commands include a channel list or scan list parameter which allows you to specify one or more channels The channel number has the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number You can specify a slot a single channel multiple channels or a range of channels as described below The following command closes a single channel channel 11 on the module installed in slot 1 ROUT CLOS 111 The following command closes multiple channels on modules in slots 1 and 2 ROUT CLOS 111 112 203 204 The following command closes a range of channels When you specify a range of channels the r
89. 45 DIO MATRIX PORT40 4 JN 46 47 QVOG HOY GQ HGH HOOD J102 aa as LH A N 198 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2265A Multifunction Module 32 31 3029 28 27 26 2524 23 2221 20191817 1615 14131211 10 9 8 6 5 4 2 N2265A Pinout P600 is a 96 pin male DIN connector mounted on the N2265A The connector and pinout assignments are shown below 1 C eooo ooooooooooooooooo ooo ooo ooo o L C AE A cans 6 ech s 22 View from the Pin Side of the Connector Pin A B Cc Pin A B Cc 1 Not used Not used COLO_L 17 Not used Not used Not used 2 Not used Not used COLO_H 18 Not used Not used Not used 3 Not used Not used COL1_L 19 BIT40 BIT41 BIT42 4 Not used Not used COL1_H 20 GND GND GND 5 Not used Not used COL2_L 21 BIT43 BIT44 BIT45 6 Not used Not used COL2_H 22 GND GND GND 7 Not used Not used COL3_L 23 BIT46 BIT47 GND 8 Not used Not used COL3_H 4 GND GND GND 9 Not used Not used ROWO_L f 25 BIT48 BIT49 BIT50 10 Not used Not used ROWO_H f 26 GND GND GND 11 Not used Not used ROW1_L 27 BIT51 BIT52 BIT53 12 Not used Not used ROW1_H f 28 GND GND GND 13 Not used Not used ROW2_L f 29 BIT54 BIT55 GND 14 Not used Not used ROW2_H 39 GND GND GND 15
90. 476A contains three Microwave Switches These switches have the following features Broad bandwidth dc to 18 GHz High isolation gt 90 dB to 18 GHz Excellent repeatability typically 0 03 dB after 1 000 000 switchings Internal 50 terminations The Agilent 8762B is a break before make switch controlled by a latching solenoid Once switched coil voltage can be removed and the switch remains in the switched position Internal coil contacts open and remove coil voltage after a switching operation to minimize the amount of heat dissipated near the switch contacts The Agilent 8762B uses SMA connectors for ease in cable connections The 3499A B C identifies this module as a 44471A on the front panel display Changing the state of channels other than channels 00 through 02 does not generate an error but has no effect Specifications for the 44476A are given on page 344 257 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44476A Microwave Switch Module 44476A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is given below The 44476A contains three 8762B Microwave Switches Each microwave switch is referred to as a channel The channels on the 44476A are numbered as 00 01 and 02 1 PORT 1 2 PORT 2 E NO NORMALLY OPEN DESIGNATORS NC NORMALLY CLOSED C COMMON DRIVE FORM C JUMPERS m DRIVE RELAYS A m wi 1 lt i ORG RELAY NO i K901 C 2 YEL 35 lt 1 i lt c C gt CHANNEL 00
91. 480B Screw Terminal Block 287 44471A 44481A Screw Terminal Connector Block 285 44471D 44481D Screw Terminal Block 287 44472A Rear Panel BNC Connectors 244 44473A 44483A Screw Terminal Connector Block 285 44474A 44484A Screw Terminal Connector Block 285 44475A 44485A Screw Terminal Connector Block 285 44476A B Rear Panel SMA Connectors 259 44477A 44477A Screw Terminal Connector Block 285 44478A B Rear Panel BNC Connectors 270 276 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information N229X Screw Terminal Blocks This terminal block is compatible with the N2290A N2291A N2292A N2293A and N2295A plug in modules Refer to each plug in module section for detailed wiring information The figure below shows the basic steps to wire and assemble this terminal block STEP 1 Remove cover STEP 2 Attach wires A The wire gauge 18 26 AWG B Insert wire into terminal connectors C Tighten screws on the connectors A Release screws on top of the cover B Press tab forward and release STEP 3 Tighten the wires STEP 4 Replace cover A Hook the top cover tabs onto the fixture A Insert the wires into the nearest cable B Press down and tighten screws boot move the cable boot to the Cable slot B Tighten the cable boot Yy ad bi 277 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information N2296A Insulation Displacement Connector The N2296A is
92. 5 Remote Interface Reference Digital I O Commands SOURce DIGital TRACe DATA lt sys mem name gt lt block_data gt This command loads a memory block with data The sys_mem_name parameter must have been previously defined The block_data is in the form lt digits gt lt length gt lt block gt where lt digits gt decides how many decimal digits are used to define lt length gt lt length gt decides how many bytes are to be transferred in lt block gt lt block gt contains the actual data to be transferred lt block gt may contain from 1 to 2048 bytes SOURce DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt TRACe lt port gt lt sys_ mem name gt This command writes a block of data stored in a memory location to the specified port The memory location must have been defined using the SOURCe DIGital TRACe DEFine command and the data written to the memory location using the SOURCe DIGital TRACe command SENSe DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt TRACe lt port gt lt sys_ mem name gt This command reads a block of data from a digital I O port and puts the data in memory The port parameter is in the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the first channel on the digital port The port parameter is plug in module dependent Valid port numbers for each plug in module are shown beginning on page 70 The BYTE WORD or LWORD forms of this command specify 8 16 and 32 bit operations respectively
93. 6 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Remote Interface Operation Set the flow control parameters using the following SCPI commands These examples assume a digital I O module is installed in slot 4 SOURce DIGital MODE 4 1 Set the flow control mode to Mode 1 SOURce DIGital CONTrol POLarity 4 1 Set the PCTL line polarity to negative SOURce DIGital FLAG POLarity 4 0 Set the PFLG line polarity to positive SOURce DIGital 1I0 POLarity 4 1 Set the I O Direction line polarity to negative Set the data line polarity using the following command SOURce DIGital DATA BYTE POLarity 400 POS Set the data line polarity of 8 bit Port 400 to positive 97 Note Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation About Flow Control Modes Handshake Five flow control modes are available for Digital I O operations Some modes use one or more of the three flow control lines I O Direction PFLG and PCTL Select the flow control you need for your digital input output applications The polarity of the flow control lines is assumed to be positive the default in the following diagrams and discussions Handshake Mode Mode Notes Number eg Definition 1 Static mode 1 Default handshake mode 2 Static mode 2 Read what was written 3 Read or Write If you set a port to this mode you cannot use and strobe the port in a scan list or use card
94. 6_H CH27_H CH28_H 7 CH9_L Not used COMO_L 23 CH29 L Not used COM1_L 8 CH9_H Not used COMO_H f 24 CH29_H Not used COM1_H 9 CH10_L CH11_L CH12_L 25 CH30_L CH31_L CH32_L 10 CH10_H CH11_H CH12_H 26 CH30_H CH31_H CH32_H 11 CH13_L CH14_L CH15 L 27 CH33_L CH34_L CH35_L 12 CH13_H CH14_H CH15_H 28 CH33_H CH34_H CH35_H 13 CH16_L CH17_L CH18_L 29 CH36_L CH37_L CH38_L 14 CH16_H CH17_H CH18_H 30 CH36_H CH37_H CH38_H 15 CH19 L Not used SE COM 31 CH39_L Not used Not used 16 CH19_H Not used SE COM 32 CH39_H Not used Not used 181 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module The Agilent N2261A GP Relay Module contains 40 independent Single Pole Single Throw SPST Form A latching relays If necessary you can pair two N2261A modules to provide 2 wire switching The N2261A can be operated in one of two modes single channel break before make BBM or multiple channels in a closed position A parallel switching feature makes the N2261A well suited for high speed switching The 40 2 wire relays on the N2261A can be separated into four groups and up to 10 relays in the same group can be closed simultaneously parallel switching The groups are group 1 channel 00 through channel 09 group 2 channel 10 through channel 19 group 3 channel 20 through channel 29 and group 4 channel 30 th
95. 9A rear panel Soni Ol Slot 4 ga be Sie lo Slot 5 ZTN Slot 3 l AO O O Slot 0 GPIB Connector RS 232 Connector Control Module Power Input Mini DIN Connector The figure below shows the Agilent 3499B rear panel l 1 Pe F EA Slot 2 Slot 0 Control Module O GPIB Connector RS 232 Connector Power Input Mini DIN Connector The figure below shows the Agilent 3499C rear panel Option FP1 1 slot and FP2 2 slot filler panels can be ordered to cover any unused slots Slot 0 r Control Module Mini DIN Connector 2 slot width Slot 9 Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 m RS 232 Connector GPIB Connector Power Input WARNING For protection from electrical shock the power cord ground must not be defeated The Mini DIN Connector The rear panel mini DIN connector is used to make connections to external triggers and the built in digital I O port An Agilent N2289A cable mini DIN to D9 can be ordered to assist connections to external devices The figure below shows the pins used in the mini DIN connector Pins Description DIO 091 DIO 092 DIO 093
96. A Quadruple 1 to 2 Optical Switch Module N2280A Quadruple 1 to 2 Optical Switch Module Typical Maximum Insertion Loss Single mode SM 0 5 dB 0 8 dB Return Loss SM 50 dB 45 dB min Polarization Dependent Loss SM 0 02 dB 0 07 dB Insertion Loss Stability 0 03 dB 0 05 dB Repeatability 0 03dB 0 005 dB Crosstalk 70 dB 60 dB Optical Input Power 300 mW Switching Time 15 ms 20 ms Cycle Rate 5 c s Relay Life 10M cycles min Operating Temperature 0 to 55 C Storage Temperature 40 to 70 C Humidity non condensing lt 80 RH Power 5 5 VDC 45mA 5 5 VDC 70mA Excluding connectors Include 0 2dB typical insertion loss for each connector a b Excluding connectors c Drift of any channel relative to one assigned reference channel at 3 C deviation of ambient temperature over a seven day period 326 Chapter 9 Specifications N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module Typical Maximum Insertion Loss Single mode SM 0 5 dB 0 8 dB Return Loss SM 50 dB 45 dB min Polarization Dependent Loss SM 0 02 dB 0 07 dB Insertion Loss Stability 0 03 dB 0 05 dB Repeatability 0 03 dB 0 005 dB Crosstalk 70 dB 60 dB Optical Input Power 300 mW Switching Time 20 ms 25 ms Cycle Rate 5 c s Relay Life 10M cycles min Operating Temperature 0 to 55 C Stor
97. A as an example to show a display similar to this N2260A 1 Press and hold the card reset key When you first press the key the display shows HOLD TO RESET When the card has been reset the display briefly shows RESET CARD and then returns to N2260A 1 To Reset All Modules You can reset all channels on all modules in the mainframe at once Press the shift key and then press and hold the reset key The display shows HOLD TO RESET When the mainframe has been reset the display will briefly show the reset and then return to the slot or channel display RESET 22 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Rack Mount the 3499A B C To Rack Mount the 3499A B C You can mount the Agilent 3499A B C on a standard 19 inch EIA rack cabinet with the optional rack mounting kits The instructions and mounting hardware are included with each rack mounting kit Agilent 3499A To rack mount a 3499A the full rack width mainframe order either e Rack mount kit with handles part number 5183 7170 or e Rack mount kit without handles part number 51838 7171 O To Rack Mount an Agilent 3499A 23 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Rack Mount the 3499A B C Agilent 3499B To rack mount a single 3499B order either Adapter kit part number 5183 717
98. ALL OPEN lt channel list gt see page 129 for more information ROUTe CPAir lt sloti gt lt slot2 gt 1 CPAir FUNCtion lt slot gt lt 1 2 3 4 WIRE1 WIRE2 BIWIRE2 WIRE4 gt FUNCtion lt slot gt DIAGnostic SPEEK lt slot gt lt register gt SPOKE lt slot gt lt register gt lt data gt see page 182 for more information ROUTe SCAN LIST lt scan_list gt SCAN LIST SCAN CLEar SCAN SIZE 122 Scan Configuration Commands Scanning Commands Digital Input Commands Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped see page 184 for more information ARM SOURce lt BUS EXTernal IMMediate TIMer MIX HOLD gt SOURCe COUNt lt number gt MIN MAX INFinity COUNt MIN MAX INFinity TIMer lt seconds gt MIN MAX TIMer MINimum MAXimum TRIGger SOURce lt BUS EXTernal IMMediate TIMer MIX HOLD gt SOURCe TIMer lt seconds gt MIN MAX TIMer MIN MAX ROUTe CHANne1 DELay lt seconds gt lt channel list gt ALL CHANnel DELay lt channel list gt CONFigure EXTernal TRIGger SOURce lt slot gt EXTernal TRIGger SOURce EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut lt 0 1 OFF ON gt EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut see page 188 for more information INITiate ABORt TRIGger IMMediate TRG see page 142 for more information SENSe DIGital DATA BIT lt bit_port gt lt BY
99. ALUE 10 1000 OPC command will wait until scan finished Call viVQueryf vi OPC Chr 10 St retStr viClose vi Close session to 3499A B C viClose drm Close session to default resource manager End 294 Chapter 8 Application Programs Visual BASIC Example Program ErrorHandler Display the error message MsgBox Error Error MB ICON EXCLAMATION If drm lt gt 1 Then viClose drm End If End VisaErrorHandler Dim strVisaErr As String 200 Call viStatusDesc defrm status strVisaErr MsgBox Error strVisaErr If drm lt gt 1 Then viClose drm End If End End Sub 295 Chapter 8 Application Programs VB net Example Program VB net Example Program This example is written in VB net The example includes Open Close Self test Digital I O and Scan commands for the 3499A B C using the Agilent T amp M Toolkit in VB net Visual Basic As the example is cur rently written the program requirements are GPIB interface selected and set to the address of 09 from the front panel A GPIB interface card installed in your PC with the VISA library An Agilent N2265A installed in Slot 1 of the mainframe The Agilent T amp M Toolkit installed on your PC Imports Agilent TMFramework Imports Agilent TMFramework InstrumentIO Public Class Forml Inherits System Windows Forms Form Region Windows Form Designer generated code Private myDir
100. ANK 0 amp BANK 1 Each bank consists of 20 2 wire channels and a corresponding common bus COMO and COM1 The channels in BANK 0 are numbered 00 through 19 and the channels in BANK 1 are numbered 20 through 39 You must modify the PC board to use this mode of operation The modification is described in the next section 4 Wire Mode In this mode the two banks BANK 0 amp BANK 1 are paired to form a 20 channel 4 wire multiplexer The first channels of each bank CH00 amp CH20 form Channel 00 the second channels of the each bank CH01 amp CH21 form Channel 01 and so on An instrument power on or reset will set the N2260A to its default configuration as a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module 178 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module Dual 2 Wire Mode PC Board Modification To operate the module in the Dual 2 wire mode you must make modifications to the module s printed circuit board Specifically you must unsolder and remove relay T99 On the PC board T99 has a reference designator of K340 The location of K340 is shown below Caution You must use proper anti static procedures de soldering techniques and equipment to prevent damage to the PC board
101. Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System e e e o e c e User s Manual a e o e oh Agilent Technologies NOTICE In August 2014 Agilent Technologies former Test and Measurement business became Keysight Technologies This document is provided as a courtesy but is no longer kept current and thus will contain historical references to Agilent For more information goto www keysight com KEYSIGHT TECHNOLOGIES Copyright Agilent Technologies Inc 1999 2012 No part of this manual may be repro duced in any form or by any means including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies as governed by the United States and international copyright laws Manual Part Number 03499 90017 Revision Revision F October 2012 Revision E March 2009 Revision D November 2002 Revision C April 2002 Revision B April 2000 Revision A September 1999 Printed in Malaysia Agilent Technologies Inc 815 14th Street S W Loveland Colorado 80537 U S A Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Further information is available on the Agilent web site at www agilent com find assist Trademar
102. As System EventArgs Handles DiglObtn Click myDirectIO WriteLine SENSE DIGITAL DATA BYTE VALue 140 Read the Digital Input results 8 bits 1 byte binary value is displayed Dim Digitalin As String Digitalin myDirectIO Read TextBox2 Text Digitalin End Sub Create and execute a scan list Private Sub Scanbtn_Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Scanbtn Click myDirectIO WriteLine SCAN 200 209 220 225 myDirectIO WriteLine INIT myDirectIO WriteLine SCAN LIST Dim Scanresults As String Scanresults myDirectIO Read Scanlst Text Scanresults End Sub End Class 297 Chapter 8 Application Programs BASIC Example Program BASIC Example Program Sample programs in this section are written in BASIC 6 0 and have been tested on a UNIX workstation Requirements GPIB interface selected and set to the address of 09 from the front panel Any one of the relay modules installed in Slot 1 of the mainframe A GPIB interface card installed in your UNIX workstation Note Either GPIB or RS 232 interface can be used in SCPI mode However we only provide and test the BASIC program examples over the GPIB interface 10 EXAMPLE BAS TEST 3499A B C IN SCPI MODE 20 DIM Retstr 128 String returned from the instrument 30 OUTPUT 709 SYSMODE SCPI Set 3499A B C to SCPI mode 40 WAIT 4 Wait 4 seconds 50 OUTPUT 709 RST Reset 3499A B C 60 WAIT 4
103. CHOO and COM10 is connected to CH10 DO lt 2 CH00 OF S lt CHO1 oN 0 COM00 GROUP 00 6 ch oF e cHo3 SDO CH10 OF CH11 oN 6 comio GROUP 10 _ aa CH12 o e CH130 N2268A Wiring Information The rear panel of the N2268A is shown below Use male SMA connectors to connect external signals to the N2268A module Group 00 Group 10 fanl Z Z T O CHANNEL 11 g Z Z O 5 fan Z Z O 0 oO 5 w Z Z O 0 QE O OL COMMON 00 oO OR CHANNEL 02 a 0 OK Q 8 CHANNEL 03 9 Common 10 Oa CHANNEL 13 jo 2 O 211 WARNING Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module The Agilent N2270A is a 10 Channel 2 wire High Voltage multiplexer typically used in the semiconductor test field The Maximum Switching Voltage is 1000 V peak and the Maximum Switching Power is 10 W The module has a metal shell to minimize interference while switching high voltage Specifications for the N2270A are given on page 321 Hazardous voltages may exist on the wiring and connectors DO NOT remove or install the module or the module connector until all external voltages have been removed N2270A Simplified Schematic A simplified sche
104. CLS command or cycle power on the instrument However a module reset or an instrument reset will not clear the error queue Front Panel Operation Press View select ERROR and press Enter The first error recorded is displayed Use the arrow key to scroll through the entire error message then turn the knob to view other errors in the error queue Remote Interface Operation The errors can be returned as integers or as variant values When an integer value is returned you need to associate the integer value with the error refer to Error Messages on page 165 If you return a variant value the error number and error string are returned To detect when errors occur using the remote interface use the SCPI status system see page 148 for more information SYSTem ERRor Query the error queue for the first error 108 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Self Test Self Test The 3499A B C can perform a self test to verify that it is in proper operation Ifthe self test is successful PASSED will be displayed on the front panel Otherwise the reason of the failure will be displayed For details of all self test failures refer to Self Test Errors on page 172 Front Panel Operation Press Menu use the knob to select SELFTEST and press Enter to perform a self test Remote Interface Operation TST Returns zero if the test is successful or non zero if it fails 109 Chap
105. D are given on page 331 44470D Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The 44470D consists of 20 2 wire relays connected to a common bus Channels on the 44470D are numbered as 00 through 19 CH00 through CH19 44470D Relay MUX i Terminal Block oT ok OL yor gH CHILO OH CH19 op 2 be cme L io ott CH18 H CH bd LJ e orf otk QL LO fH CHIL ou CHL t of oL aL l 7 oH CH10 o g CHILO L f l Common Bus E Common Bus t of oL L L 17 oH CHOS OH CHO9 oT oL Qu 4 1 oH CH08 o H CH08 a bd x of ok QL 17 iH CHOL o n CHOL of ok L af H_CHOO OH CHOO 233 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module 44470D Wiring Information Use the Agilent 44480B Terminal Block to make connections to the 44470D One 44480B is supplied with the module The terminal block connectors are shown below Additional information about the terminal block is given on page 287 ied Forde rear ae C09DDOODODODSO th gt Ey vOld t H WL CH107 CH11 7 CH127CH13CH147 COM L ale ale al alt H u NH
106. DIO 094 GROUND TRIG GROUND DIO Ext Trig In Ext Trig Out Mini DIN Connector D gt oa ON ao wh In This Book Quick Start Chapter 1 prepares the switch control system for use and helps you get familiar with a few of its front panel features Front Panel Menu Operation Chapter 2 introduces you to the front panel menu and describes some of the switch control system s menu features System Overview Chapter 3 gives an overview of a switch control system describes how parts of the system work together and describes the channel addressing scheme used Features and Functions Chapter 4 gives a detailed description of the switch control system s capabilities and operation This chapter is useful for operating the switch control system from the front panel or the remote interface Remote Interface Reference Chapter 5 contains a SCPI language reference used to program the switch control system over a remote interface Error Messages Chapter 6 lists the error messages that may appear as you are working with the instrument Plug in Modules Chapter 7 gives detailed information for each plug in module Each module and its wiring is described Additionally wiring information for terminal blocks crimp and insert connections BNC and SMA connections and special cables is included Application Programs Chapter 8 contains several remote interface application programs to help you develop programs for your switch con
107. FFFFFFF Values above 2 1 must be converted to the 2 s complement form and sent as negative numbers SOURce DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt BLOCK lt port gt lt block data gt This writes block data to the specified port Block data has the form lt digits gt lt length gt lt block gt where lt digits gt decides how many decimal digits are used to define lt length gt lt length gt decides how many bytes are to be transferred in lt block gt lt block gt contains the actual data to be transferred lt block gt may contain from 1 to 2048 bytes Set port to 090 to write blocks to the built in 4 bit digital I O port The first parameter sets how the value of block_data is interpreted If you omit the parameter BYTE data is assumed For example the command below sends a block of data ABCDEFGHIJ to 16 bit port 100 Since the ASCII characters A and B have decimal values of 65 and 66 respectively the binary equivalent of 65 and 66 are written to port 100 A is written to the upper 8 bits and B to the lower 8 bits then the C and D are written and so on SOUR DIG DATA WORD BLOCK 100 210ABCDEFGHIJ 144 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Digital O Commands Digital I O Memory Commands You can use the Agilent 3499A B C internal memory to store digital data After defining the memory you can put data in memory for later writing to a digital port or you can read digital port
108. GPIB Interface Each device on the GPIB interface must have a unique address When shipped from the factory the GPIB interface is selected and its address is set to 9 The GPIB address of the instrument can be set to any value between 0 and 30 The GPIB address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when the instrument is turned off or reset Switching between SCPI mode and 3488A mode causes the 3499A B C to select the GPIB interface and its address setting To set the GPIB interface 1 Press the Menu key The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the first level menu is shown CARD PAIR C 2 Turn the knob to select INTERFACE in the menu INTERFACE 3 Press Enter to show the second level menu The active interface is shown If necessary turn the knob until GPIB 488 is displayed GPIB 488 46 O E Press Enter to select the interface and show the first parameter Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure the Remote Interface ADDRESS 09 Turn the knob to set GPIB address i e 07 Valid addresses range from 00 to 30 ADDRESS 07 Press Enter to show the second parameter SRQ ON Press Enter to enable the instrument to assert the SRQ line when powered up If the computer is so configured this can be used to interrupt the system computer To disable this feature turn the knob to select
109. H07 CH07 LAs L D CH06 f L CH05 Common Bus CH04 CH03 CH02 Q T 01 Q I fo fo P9OSHSKKHGHHNSP NSPS OGNONNggsg Custom Signal Conditioning The 44470A circuit board has provision that allow you to install simple attenuators or filter networks Three circuit pads in each relay path are provided that allow you to install components in the signal Hi path Lo path or as a shunt from Hi to Lo The figure below shows the 44470A circuit board locations where components can be installed LOW SERIES GY WAGTY e y e Goeh er SIGH o CN a BIGHT r 9 Blip A B2SHN Tel a 6hr Tet ecb a TR been TT A Se6hn a tS A Ze6nr TT B2BHh Q o o gt a a o a Cy 6 AS 9e99 0815 AIR ROAR AR OG 2 OS2H22vI Id HIGH SERIES 231 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module Creating attenuators An attenuator is composed of two resistors that act as a voltage divider A typical attenuator circuit is also shown below series element SIGNAL R1 SIGNAL INPUT R2 OUTPUT Vin Vout shunt element Vout Vin R2 R1 R2 To select the attenuator components use the following equation Vo VixR2 R1 R2 One typical use for the shunt component is to convert the output of 4 to 20 mA transducers to a voltage that can be measured using a DMM A 50 Q 41
110. H4_H 15 CHO_H 8 CH4_L 16 CHO_L Over temperature Pinout J103 is an SMB connector mounted on the rear panel of the N2267A The center conductor is a TTL signal The shield is connected to the module ground 209 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module The Agilent N2268A consists of two independent 1 to 4 MUX switches GROUP 00 and GROUP 10 that provide bidirectional switching The latching relays in this module are configured in a tree structure to provide isolation and low VSWR voltage standing wave ratio Each channel in this module can switch up to 30 Vdc or peak ac at frequencies from dc to 3 0 GHz Specifications for the N2268A are given on page 319 N2268A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown on the next page The N2268A contains two 1 to 4 MUXs designated as GROUP 00 and GROUP 10 The two groups are isolated from each other Each 1 to 4 multiplexer consists of three form C relays A tree relay is connected to the common channel The two channel relays allow selection of one of the four channel in each group Channels in each group are break before make and are numbered as 00 through 03 for GROUP 00 and 10 through 13 for GROUP 10 210 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module One channel in each group is connected to the common terminals By default COMOO is connected to
111. I lt 10 mA output eee ete iaw lt 0 8 V I lt 600 mA input EEN Vin high 22 0 V Input Characteristics Vin low lt 08V E HANDSHAKE LINES Maximum Voltage Line Chassis 5 V dc Vout high 22 4 V I lt 400 pA output Output Characteristics Vout low lt 0 5 V I1 lt 1 mA input lout low lt 25 mA when shorted to 5 V Pina Vin high gt 2 0V Input Characteristics Vin low lt 08V 309 Chapter 9 Specifications N2264A Multifunction Module N2264A Multifunction Module The maximum number of channels that can be closed simultaneously is 10 including the GP and High Current GP relays The maximum carrying current is 15 A including the GP High Current GP and Digital I O 16 bit Digital I O Function I O LINES Bit Number 16 Maximum Voltage Line Chassis 42 V de Maximum Sink Current Per Bit 600 mA eee Vout high gt 2 4 V I lt 10 mA output OMPULChateclenstcs Vout low lt 0 8 V I lt 600 mA input ee Vin high gt 2 0V Input Characteristics Vin low lt 08V E HANDSHAKE LINES Maximum Voltage Line Chassis 5 V dc Vout high gt 2 4 V I lt 400 pA output Output Characteristics Vout low lt 0 5 V I lt 1 mA input lout low lt 25 mA when shorted to 5 V itn Vin high gt 2 0V Input Characteristics Vin low lt 08V 310 12 Channel GP Relay Function Chapter 9 Specifications N2264A Multifunction Module E INPUT
112. IGital DATA BYTE 400 128 Write decimal 128 to 8 bit port 400 SOURCE DIGital DATA WORD 400 21845 Write decimal 21845 to 16 bit port 400 SOURCE DIGital DATA LWORD 400 2114 Write decimal 4294965182 to 32 bit port 400 WORD values greater then 32767 and LWORD values greater then for 23 1 are sent as negative numbers These values are in 2 s complement form 105 Chapter 4 Features and Functions State Storage State Storage The 3499A B C provides the capability to store setups and then recall them to put the instrument back into a known configuration Information that can be stored includes Status of all relay channels open or closed Status of digital I O ports input or output flow control etc Special module configurations 2 wire card pair etc Scan lists and configuration arm source trigger source etc Remote interface settings address baud etc Additionally you can include a stored state in a scan list as a channel Firmware Revision Differences State storage behavior differs depending upon the firmware revision of your 3499A B C see page 59 Firmware revision 1 0 must be upgraded Please contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Office for details Firmware revisions 2 0 and 3 0 allow up to 10 states to be stored Firmware revision 4 0 allows up to 50 stored states Stored states are lost if power is removed for firmware revisions 2
113. If omitted BYTE is assumed SENSe DIGital TRACE DATA lt sys_ mem name gt This query returns a block of data from the specified memory location the data is returned in the form lt digits gt lt length gt lt block gt where lt digits gt decides how many decimal digits are used to define lt length gt lt length gt decides how many bytes are to be transferred in lt block gt lt block gt contains the actual data to be transferred lt block gt may contain from 1 to 2048 bytes 146 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference State Storage Commands State Storage Commands The 3499A B C provides the capability to store setups and then recall them to put the instrument back into a known configuration The operation of state storage is dependent upon the instrument s firmware revision Refer to State Storage on page 106 for more details The mem parameter specifies memory locations Storage memory locations are numbered 01 to 10 for Firmware revisions 1 0 2 0 and 3 0 Memory locations are number 01 to 50 for Firmware revision 4 0 Saved states can be used as a channel in scan lists Saved states are not affected by the reset RST command SAV lt mem gt This IEEE488 2 common command saves the current instrument setup in the memory location specified A saved memory location can be used in a scan list as a channel RCL lt mem gt This IEEE488 2 common command restores the instrume
114. Mode again to exit the current configuration the CONFIG annunciator turns off Once you have selected the data display format for a port it applies to both input and output operations on that port 35 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To View Instrument Errors To View Instrument Errors You can view errors from the front panel This feature is especially useful when developing remote instrument control If an error occurs the ERROR annunciator in the display will light Errors are stored in the error queue in the order they occur You read the errors in the same order After all errors have been read the queue is empty and the ERROR annunciator turns off To view instrument errors 1 Press the View key The VIEW annunciator lights up and the display shows the first menu level ERROR 0 2 Press Enter to view the first error a Ifno error is in the error queue the ERROR annunciator is off the display shows NO ERROR and then automatically returns to the first level of the View menu NO ERROR 0 ERROR 0 b If there are errors the ERROR annunciator is on the first error in the error queue is displayed 01 ERR 109 Press the right arrow key to scroll the display to show the entire error message MISSING PARAMETER 36 10 Note Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To View Instrument Errors 3 Turn the knob to view other errors
115. Module Group 0 s00 s01 s02 s03 Group 1 s10 s11 s12 s13 44478B 75 Q 1 3 GHz MUX Module Group 0 s00 s01 s02 s03 Group 1 s10 s11 s12 s13 a A channel number on a matrix module is formed in Slot Row Column format i e channel address s23 means row 2 column 3 in Slot s 73 Chapter 3 System Overview Factory Default and Reset States Factory Default and Reset States The table on the next page shows the settings of the instrument after a reset in SCPI mode as well as the default settings when the instrument is shipped from the factory A table showing the 3488 reset settings is given on page 76 e You can reset the instrument either by pressing Shift Card Reset on the front panel or with a RST command over the remote interface If a module is accidentally removed or installed while the instrument power is on the instrument will preform a reset 74 SCPI Mode Defaults Chapter 3 System Overview Factory Default and Reset States Item Factory Default Reset Interface GPIB 488 GPIB Address 9 Keep current setting RS 232 Keep current setting System Mode SCPI Mode SCPI Mode Keep current setting 3488A Mode Keep current setting System Related Display State On On Stored State Empty Keep current setting Error Queue Empty Not cleared Module Related Switching Channels Open Open Digital I O Ports Inpu
116. N2260A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic of the N2260A is shown below The 40 2 wire channel relays CH00 CH89 are divided into two banks BANK 0 and BANK 1 Each bank consists of 20 2 wire switching channels and a common bus COMO amp COM1 There is also a single ended common terminal SE COM used when the multiplexer is configured to 80 channel 1 wire mode The two tree relays T98 and T99 are used to configure the N2260A CHOO me Li H CH09 O OO eee O CH10 OO eoo O H CH19 CH20 Li H2 g CHA QS OO eeeGS O COMI H CH30 CH39 OO eee O cco COMO SE COM BANK 0 BANK 1 177 Note Note Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module 1 Wire Mode In this mode either the High H or Lo L terminal of a channel is switched to the single ended SE COM terminal The Lo terminals form the first 40 1 wire channels 00 39 and the Hi terminals form the second 40 1 wire channels 40 79 Only one channel can be closed at a time in the 1 wire mode 2 Wire Mode This is the default mode of the N2260A and provides 40 2 wire channels In this mode the Hi and Lo terminals of a channel are switched to Hi and Lo common terminals COMO and COM1 The channels are numbered 00 through 39 Dual 2 Wire Mode In this mode the N2260A is separated into two independent banks B
117. NFigure EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut command enables or disables the external trigger out pulse This pulse is output after a channel is closed during a scan operation when enabled The output pulse timing may be delayed after the channel is closed if the ROUTe CHANnel DELay command has been set for the channel After power on or a reset RST command is received the output pulse is disabled OFF The CONFigure EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut query returns either a Q disabled or 1 enabled indicating the status of the external trigger output 137 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Scanning Commands Scanning Commands These commands enable the scan stop the scan and provide triggers for arm and trigger layer sources INITiate This command takes the instrument out of the idle state and moves it to the arm layer If the ARM SOURce is set to IMMediate the instrument moves directly to the trigger layer If the TRIGger SOURce is set to IMMediate the scan begins You must always send the INITiate command to move the instrument out of the idle state regardless of the arm and trigger sources used For example if you set the arm source to EXTernal the instrument will not move to the trigger layer until the INITiate command is received and then an external trigger occurs ABORt This command stops a scan in progress This command does not affect the scan configuration or the scan list A reset RST comma
118. ON lt slot ALL gt Reset the module to its power on state See page 157 CTYPe lt slot gt Query the card type and the serial number See page 153 ERRor Query the error queue See page 153 LOCal Set the instrument to local mode See page 160 REMote Set the instrument to remote mode See page 160 RWLock Lock all keys on the front panel See page 160 STATe DELete lt 1 10 gt ALL Clear one or all the previously stored instrument states See page 147 VERSion Query the firmware version of the instrument See page 153 TRIGger IMMediate Software trigger for HOLD off triggering See page 138 SOURce lt BUS EXTernal IMMediate TIMer MIX HOLD gt Select trigger source in trigger layer See page 135 SOURCe Query trigger source in trigger layer See page 135 TIMer lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum Set timer for channel to channel scanning See page 136 TIMer lt MINimum MAXimum gt Query timer in trigger layer See page 136 2 e D 2 ep D lt 121 Note Switch Commands Specific Plug in Commands Scan List Commands Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped 3499A B C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped Default command parameters are shown in bold see page 127 for more information ROUTe CLOSe lt channel_list gt CLOSe lt channel_list gt CLOSe STATe OPEN lt channel_ list gt
119. RS RMT and ERROR annunciators may turn on even when the front panel display is turned off After an instrument power on or a reset command RST the display will be turned on The DIAGnostic DISPlay STATe query returns the display status The returned value is either a 0 or a 1 indicating the display is turned off or on respectively 158 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference System Level Control Commands DIAGnostic MONitor lt slot gt lt channel1 gt lt port gt 1 MONitor The DIAGnostic MONitor command enables the monitor mode for a plug in module channel or port on the specified module Send the 1 value to disable the monitor mode Only one slot one channel or one port can be monitored each time More information about monitoring is given on page 80 For the built in 4 bit Digital I O you may monitor the port 090 or bits 091 to 094 For the plug in DIO modules you may only monitor the 8 bit ports The Tree Relays s98 s99 on an N2260A or N2266A cannot be monitored The monitor is disabled after an instrument power on or a reset command The DIAGnostic MONitor query returns the slot channel or port being monitored The returned value will be a valid slot number or channel address A 1 is returned if monitor is inactive SYSMODE lt 0 1 SCPI HP3488 gt SYSMODE The 3499A B C can be operated in either one of the two system modes SCPI mode and 3488A mode The SYSMODE com
120. Remove all data block in system memory See page 145 2 e 3 D Q ep 3 D lt 119 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference SENSe DIGital DATA BIT lt bit_port gt Read the specified bit_port See page 146 DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt VALue lt port gt Read data from the specified port See page 146 DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt BLOCK lt port gt lt size gt Read a block of data from the specified port See page 146 DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt TRACE lt port gt lt sys_mem_name gt Read a block of data from the specified port to the predefined memory block See page 146 TRACe DATA lt sys_mem_name gt Get the data block being read See page 146 STATus OPERation CONDition Query the Operation Condition register See page 150 OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt s Set the Operation Enable register See page 150 OPERation ENABle Query the Operation Enable register See page 150 OPERation EVENt Query the Operation Event register See page 150 PRESet Clear the Standard Operation enable register See page 150 SYSMODE lt 0 1 SCPI HP3488A gt Specify a system mode for the instrument See page 159 SYSMODE Query the system mode for the instrument See page 159 fa z z cp D G O O 120 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference SYSTem CP
121. SS SS S S TT TSS OST Go X X y PoC CCC CC OE COCO iS G a d CK 6 Ooo OKKO il AGOCCESESCEEEEHEEL COCCO GGG 10 630 OOOO OOOOC COOCECECEOOEEEEOEOMOOOOODOC GOEGCEOGGEESOOHOH HHOHOOOOE 5 OOOO OC rO ied OG000G b OGBOOCO0 SEOGGO006 SEOGOOOOE GQHHHLOHOOS Component mounting area SH OOOHAO OE SECEGCHGHOS 5G OF 6 0 AGEOCCCE COCEECEE Backplane interface c user suppl cacadan cocde C COOCECEEECEOHOOOOCS GGGCCCUGe CCCOCECOEHE SGCCCOCEECECECEOCUEEE ec Geooae ac G coe ee o OOOO CEC CE oaaccacoeoco dedede cocoge CEE OOOO OO A GECOEGGEEEEE GESCECECEECEEEEE SOOHHHOHHOE COCECE OOOO C a COOCCEEEEEEE EOE EOHEOOOOOOS COO OOOO CO cooccocceccaoad HHOHOMOHHHOC c ceo cococoa cage ec are Cee eee GG dogo co Gda decccooccoeddda a CC GC cac OCOGOGCOSEESEEOOOHOOOEOOO COC 0 0010 coacec G EIC lt a CL COCO EOE OE OO OO 6 OO 616 0 610 00 0 006 OL COCECOEOEOCOEC ECE HO EOC HOOCOHE CL CCOOGOC EE OOOO OOO OO COO OOOO COPCCCOECEEOCO EOE LE EE OEOEE CUOECOCOOCEE EE OEE EEE E EOE eee ee CC OCOOCOCECEE OO OOO EOC 66 06 6 6 0 6 e eee e T AECE CTTO lecccoeccccccdr G Gaaoaceeece ecaaacacecer ecoaacace Gea G Gs amp 4G e CECE CECECCCCECE CCE COG OCCCOSCCG
122. TE WORD LWORD gt VALue lt port gt lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt BLOCK lt port gt lt size gt 123 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped Digital Output see page 143 for more information Commands SOURce DIGital DATA BIT lt bit_port gt lt 0 1 gt lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt VALue lt port gt lt data gt lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt BLOCK lt port gt lt block_data gt Digital see page 140 for more information Configuration Commands SOURce DIGital MODE lt slot gt lt mode gt MODE lt slot gt CONTrol POLarity lt slot gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt CONTrol POLarity lt slot gt FLAG POLarity lt slot gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt FLAG POLarity lt slot gt 10 POLarity lt slot gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt I10 POLarity lt slot gt SOURce DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt POLarity lt port gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt POLarity lt port gt Digital I O see page 145 for more information Memory Commands SOURce DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt TRACe lt port gt lt sys_mem_name gt SOURce DIGital TRACe DEFine lt sys_mem_name gt lt size gt lt fill gt DEFine lt sys_mem_name gt DEFine CATalog DATA lt sys_mem_name gt lt block_data gt DELete NAME lt sys_mem_name gt DELete ALL j o w T SENSe DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt TRACe lt port
123. To close open scan one channel is actually to close open scan a 2 wire pair Dual 2 Wire Mode 3 BIWIRE2 configures the MUX as two independent 20 channel 2 wire MUX modules The valid channel numbers are s00 s39 s00 s19 for the first MUX and s20 s39 for the second 4 Wire Mode 4 WIRE4 This mode configures the N2260A or N2266A as a 20 channel 4 wire MUX module Channels 20 through 39 2 wire are automatically paired with Channels 00 through 19 The valid channel numbers are s00 s19 To close open scan a channel is actually closing opening scanning a 4 wire connection in this mode If two modules are paired changing the configuration on one module will result in the other module being changed to the same configuration Two modules CANNOT be paired if they are configured differently 130 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Specific Plug in Module Commands The ROUTe FUNCtion query returns the current configuration of the module in the specified slot The returned string will be one of WIRE1 WIRE2 BIWIRE2 or WIRE4 An error is generated if no module is installed ROUTe DIAGnostic SPEEK lt slot gt 4 SPOKE lt slot gt 0 lt data gt These commands read and write an 8 bit data register on the 44475A Breadboard Module see page 251 Using these commands with newer modules models beginning with N22xxx will generate an error Valid slot numbers are 3499A slots 1 through 5 3499B slots 1 through
124. UX Port O Oyie Agilent N2276 MICROWAVE SWITCH 224 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2280A Quadruple 1 to 2 Optical Switch Module N2280A Quadruple 1 to 2 Optical Switch Module The Agilent N2280A Module contains four 1 to 2 optical switches All four optical switches are non latching For each switch only one channel can be closed at a time Closing a channel will open the other channel in the same switch After power on or a reset the common channel of each 1 to 2 optical switch is connected to the second channel by default Specifications for the N2280A are given on page 326 N2280A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The N2280A consists of four independent 1 to 2 optical switches Each optical switch has one COMx and two branch channels named Chx0 and Chx1 Ch00 Ch10 oOo COM1 SN Pe Ch01 nommally closed Pe Chi 1 Normally closed see Ch30 oOo COM3 one ao Ch21 Normally closed Ch31 Normally closed N2280A Wiring Information Use SC APC connectors to connect external optical signals to the N2280A module The rear panel of the N2280A is shown below 3 Agilent E a OOo 225 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module The Agilent N2281A Module consists of two 1 to 4 optical switches The two optical switches are non latchi
125. X Module latching Switches N2282A Optical Switch 1 to 8 2 Latching One 1 to 8 Optical Switch MUX Module 69 Chapter 3 System Overview Channel and Slot Addressing Channel and Slot Addressing A channel refers to an individual relay on a switching module or an individual bit port on a digital I O module The channel address is in the form of snn where s represents slot number and nn represents a channel number For all mainframes slot 0 refers to the 3499A B C control board Valid slot numbers are 3499A slots 0 through 5 3499B slots 0 through 2 3499C slots 0 through 9 The channel number nn is plug in module dependent Detailed information about channel numbers of individual plug in modules is given below and on the following pages Channel Addressing snn Plug in Module s Slot Number nn Channel Number N2260A 1 Wire Mode s00 s01 s78 s79 40 Channel MUX Module 2 Wire Mode s00 s01 538 s39 Dual 2 Wire Mode s00 s07 s38 s39 4 Wire Mode s00 s07 518 s19 N2261A s00 s01 s02 03 37 38 S39 40 Channel GP Relay Module N2262A 4X8 Matrix Module Row 0 1 2 3 Column 0 1 2 3 6 7 s00 s01 s02 s07 10 11 12 17 s20 821 22 27 530 31 32 s37 9 a The N2260A and N2266A can be used as an 80 channel 1 wire MUX module a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module two 20 channel 2 wire MUX modules or a 20 channel 4 wire MUX modu
126. a lines is not changed by this command Following power on or a reset RST command the polarity is set to 0 or POS 141 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Digital I O Commands Digital Input Commands These commands read individual bits or complete ports Some digital I O configuration commands may affect how these bits are read The port parameter is in the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the first channel on the digital port The port parameter is plug in module dependent Valid port numbers for each plug in module are shown beginning on page 70 SENSe DIGital DATA BIT lt bit port gt This query reads a bit from the specified bit_port and returns either a 0 or a 1 bit_port is in the form of snn where s is the slot number and nn is the bit number The built in 4 bit digital I O port has bit numbers 091 to 094 The plug in module bit numbers are module dependent see page 70 SENSe DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt VALue lt port gt This query reads data from the specified port and returns an integer representing the binary weighted value of the bits The value returned depends upon the first parameter as follows BYTE reads 8 bits and returns an integer between 0 and 255 00 and FF WORD reads 16 bits and returns an integer between 32768 and 32767 8000 and 7FFF Negative numbers returned are 2 s complement numbers e LWORD reads 32 bits and re
127. a relay and cannot report a failed relay 127 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Switch Commands ROUTe CLOSe STATe This query returns a comma delineated list of the closed channel relays for all relays on all installed plug in modules The returned values will be in the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number The returned values indicate the programmed state of the relay This query does not physically monitor a relay and cannot report a failed relay ROUTe OPEN lt channel list gt ALL OPEN lt channel list gt This command opens all the switching channels specified in the channel_list The channel_list has the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number See the CLOSe command description for a description of channel_list The OPEN query returns a 1 for open channels and a 0 for a closed channel If you specify a list of channels the query returns a comma separated list of 0 s and 1 s in the same order as the channel_list The returned values indicate the programmed state of the relay This query does not physically monitor a relay and cannot report a failed relay 128 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Specific Plug in Module Commands Specific Plug in Module Commands ROUTe CPAir lt slot1 gt lt slot2 gt 1 CPAir This command is used to group two cards of the same type together effectively assigning both cards to bot
128. age Temperature 40 to 70 C lt 80 RH Humidity non condensing Power 5 5 VDC 45mA 5 5 VDC 70mA Excluding connectors Include 0 2dB typical insertion loss for each connector a b Excluding connectors c Drift of any channel relative to one assigned reference channel at 3 C deviation of ambient temperature over a seven day period 327 Chapter 9 Specifications N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module Minimum Typical Maximum Channel Count 1 to 8 Switch Type Latching Return Loss SM 62 dB 57 dB Insertion Loss SM 0 5 dB 0 7 dB Insertion Loss Stability 0 02 dB 0 025 dB Polarization Dependent Loss 0 02 dB 0 04 dB PDL Insertion Repeatability Sequential Switching 0 005 dB 0 01 dB Random Switching 0 01 dB 0 05 dB Crosstalk 90 dB 80 dB Input Power Optical es Switching Time 250 ms Wavelength SM 1270 nm 1670 nm Relay Life 10M cycles Operating Temperature 0 C 55 C Humidity non condensing Cue c Excluding connector Excluding Connectors 0 2 dB typical connector insertion loss Measured after one hour s warm up Measured after temperature has been stablized for one hour a2oop 328 Chapter 9 Specifications 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 10 Maximum Voltage Termin
129. ainframes all operate the same from the front panel This chapter does not give a detailed description of every possible front panel operation It does however give you a good overview of the front panel menus and front panel keys See the Features and Functions chapter on page 77 for additional discussions of the instrument s capabilities and operation This chapter contents include To Power On the Instrument on page 29 To Monitor a Channel or a Slot on page 29 To Use a Digital I O Port on page 31 To View Instrument Errors on page 36 Scanning Operation on page 38 To Pair Two Modules Together on page 41 To Configure for External Trigger on page 42 To Configure the Power on State on page 44 To Configure the Remote Interface on page 46 To Perform a Self test on page 51 To Query the Firmware Revision on page 52 To Query the Serial Number on page 53 Local Remote Control on page 54 The following conventions are used for the front panel operation All keys on the front panel keyboard are expressed in bold font and normally associated with a press For example press Mon All the front panel display annunciators are expressed in bold font followed by an annunciator For example MON annunciator The information shown on the front panel display is enclosed within a pair of quotation marks 28 Note Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Power On the Instrument To Power On the Instrumen
130. al 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module 325 N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module 325 N2280A Quadruple 1 to 2 Optical Switch Module 326 N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module 327 N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module 328 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module 329 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module 331 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module 333 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module 335 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module 337 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module 339 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module 341 44475A Breadboard Module 342 44476A Microwave Switch Module 344 44476B Microwave Switch Module 344 44477A Form C Relay Module 345 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules 347 Index 349 12 Quick Start Quick Start This chapter describes the procedure to install the plug in modules into an Agilent 3499A B C mainframe and mount the mainframe onto a system rack The basic operations of the Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System is also described The chapter contents include To Prepare the Instrument for Use on page 15 To Install a Module in the 3499A B C on page 17 Basic Operation on page 19 To Rack Mount the 3499A B C on page 23 14 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Prepare the Instrument for Use To Prepare the Instrument for Use 1 Check the list of supplied items Verify that you have received the following items with your Agilent 3499A B C mainframe One power co
131. al Terminal or Terminal Chassis 250 V dc or ac rms Maximum Current Per Channel or Module 2 A dc or ac rms Maximum Power Per Channel or Module 60 W dc 500 VA ac Maximum Overvoltage Transients 1400 Vox Thermal Offset lt 3 nV differential or single ended Initial Closed Channel lt 1 Resistance Relay Life Dry Load of lt 300 mA amp lt 10 V 108 ay cad Maximum Rated Load 10 Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION Open Channel lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q Channel Channel lt 40 C 95 RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed HI LO lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 95 RH gt 1089 Channel Chassis lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q lt 40 C 95 RH gt 5x 108 with 1 channel closed a Using the 44474A external increment amp channel closed display off 329 Chapter 9 Specifications 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Open Channel Channel Channel lt 5pF Capacitance with 1 channel closed MI EO lt 27 pF Channel Chassis lt 80 pF Insertion Loss LOO he lt 0 20 dB with 509 termination T MHz lt 0 25 dB 10 MHz lt 0 50 dB Crosstalk 100 KDZ lt 73 dB with 50Q termination 1 MHz lt 53 dB 10 MHz lt 33 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of out
132. al tests are being performed The self test takes several seconds to complete If the self test is successful PASSED will be displayed Otherwise the reason of the failure will be displayed For details on self test failures refer to Self Test Errors on page 172 PASSED 4 Press Enter to return to the first level of the menu SELFTEST 5 Press Menu again to exit the Menu menu the CONFIG annunciator turns off 51 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Query the Firmware Revision To Query the Firmware Revision Perform the following procedure to query the 3499A B C firmware and revision For a description of the firmware and hardware revisions see Firmware and Control Module Description on page 59 1 Press the Menu key The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the first level menu is shown CARD PAIR Turn the knob to select REVISION INFO REVISION INFO 3 Press Enter The system firmware revision number will be displayed REVISION 4 0 2 0 Press Enter to return to the first level of the Menu menu N A REVISION INFO Press Menu again to exit the Menu menu the CONFIG annunciator turns off oO 52 uC Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Query the Serial Number To Query the Serial Number Perform the following procedure to query the 3499A B C serial number 1 Press the Menu key The CONFIG annunciator lig
133. al trigger pulse to start of switch open or close b The system speed specification may vary in a small range due to the speed of the remote PC the GPIB module the version of VISA and the version of 3499A B C s firmware used c Measured from the time at which the command terminator is taken from the bus to the time at which the relay begins to open or close 302 Chapter 9 Specifications N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 80 1 wire or 40 2 wire or dual 20 2 wire or 20 4 wire Maximum Voltage Terminal Terminal or 200 V dc or ac rms Terminal Chassis Per Channel 1 A dc or ac rms Maximum Current Per Module 2A dc or ac rms Per Channel 60 W dc 62 5 VA ac Maximum Power Per Module 120 W dc 125 VA ac Thermal Offset lt 3 uV differential or single ended Initial Closed Channel lt 1 2 Resistance Relay Life Mechanical 108 at 36000 operations hour Meee Electrical 5 x 10 1A load Maximum Scan Rate 80 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION with terminal block Open Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 Q Channel Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 9Q with 1 channel closed HI LO lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 99 Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 O with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10
134. an insulation displacement connector you can use with the N2260A N2261A N2262A N2263A N2264A and N2265A modules The figure below shows the basic steps to wire and assemble this terminal Refer to the specific plug in module wiring information for details about the connector and pin out assignments STEP 1 Remove cover STEP 2 Attach wires A The wire gauge 18 26 AWG B Insert wire into a contact on the 96 pin DIN A Release screws on top of the cover connector and tighten it B Press tab forward and release Note The cover with two screws on both sides is the bottom cover the other is the top cover STEP 3 Tighten the wires STEP 4 Replace cover A Hook the top cover tabs onto the Bottom cover B Press down and tighten screws A Insert the wires into the nearest cable boot move the cable boot to the cable slot B Tighten the cable boot Note The label on the 96 pin DIN connector must be toward you 278 96 pin male DIN connector on the plug in module 3231 302928 27 262524 232221 20191817 1615 1413121110 98 76 543 21 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information N2297A DIN9Q6 to twin D50 Cable The N2297A is a female DIN96 to twin male D50 Cable The cable uses 26 AWG wire which meets UL AWM 2464 with overall foil shield The maximum voltage is 200 volts per wire The figure below shows the connections between the D96 and the two D50s Refer to t
135. and 400 Q an appropriate protection network to be connected to this circuit is R 220 Q and Cp 0 15 pF Using Varistors Just as contact protection circuits are important to suppress noise while relay contacts are opening and closing transient protection should be provided while the relays are open This is the purpose of the varistor When selecting a varistor make certain that it has a voltage rating sufficient for your application A typical 250 VAC varistor can be purchased with the Agilent part number 0873 0227 274 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information Terminals and Connections Information This section contains details about each of the terminals and connections available for the plug in modules Some modules have more than one available terminal The table below shows the terminals available for each plug in module The general wiring information about each terminal is on the listed page number Additionally for some terminals you will need to consult the specific plug in module for connector pin out diagrams and assignments Plug in Module Available Terminal s Page N2260A N2290A Screw Terminal Block 277 N2296A Direct wiring insulation displacement connector 278 N2297A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable 279 N2299A DIN96 to quad D25 cable 281 N2261A N2291A Screw Terminal Block 277 N2296A Direct wiring insulation displacement connector 278 N2297A DIN96 to
136. ange may contain invalid channels they are ignored but the first and last channel in the list must be valid ROUT CLOS 101 111 Additional information about channel and slot numbering is given on page 70 115 re z z i D G O O Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference Note Default command parameters are shown in bold ABORE Abort a scan in progress regardless of the trigger source See page 138 ARM SOURce lt BUS EXTernal IMMediate TIMer MIX HOLD gt Set trigger source in ARM layer See page 134 SOURCe Query trigger source in ARM layer See page 134 COUNt lt number gt MIN MAX Set counter in ARM layer See page 134 COUNt MIN MAX Query counter in ARM layer See page 134 TIMer lt seconds gt MIN MAX Set timer for sweep to sweep sweeping See page 135 TIMer Query timer in arm layer See page 135 CONFigure EXTernal TRIGger SOURce lt number gt Select the trigger source See page 137 EXTernal TRIGger SOURce Query the trigger source See page 137 EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut lt 0 1 OFF ON gt Turn off on the external trigger output See page 137 EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut Query state of external trigger output See page 137 116 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference DIAGnostic DISP
137. annels you must cycle the power to the module reset and channel commands will not work Note that cycling power to regain control will only work if the module temperature has dropped below 59 C 188 F otherwise the protection circuitry will be activated again 206 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module Protection Network The module circuit board contains provisions to allow you to mount relay protection circuits Inductive loads may exhibit large transient currents that can damage the relay contacts The type of protection and component values are determined by the loads being switched More detailed information about protection circuits is given on page 272 VARISTOR RELAY j ga CONTACT NO O RC NETWORK The N2267A circuit board has a provision to allow you to install protection networks in the relay paths The figure below shows the locations on the main circuit board Channel 00 Channel 07 Protection Networks 207 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module N2267A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The N2267A consists of eight independent high current channels each containing a Single Pole Single Throw SPST Normally Open Form A relay AgilentN2267A Module Connector gor 5 OL Aug i gt OH 2 L CHI gt OH r e i e e i e gt OH
138. apter 5 Remote Interface Reference About the SCPI Language Parameters These are parameter types used with the SCPI language Parameter Type Description Numeric Boolean Discrete Accepts all commonly used decimal representations of number including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation 123 123E2 123 1 23E2 123 1 23E 2 1 23000E 01 Special cases include MINimum MAXimum and DEFault Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false ON OFF 1 0 Selects from a finite number of values These parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting An example is the TRIGger SOURce lt source gt command where source can be BUS EXT HOLD or IMM Parameters shown within square brackets are optional Note that the brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the instrument If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the instrument uses the default value For example consider the ARM COUNt lt MIN MAX gt command If you send the command without specifying a parameter the present ARM COUNt setting is returned If you send the MIN parameter the command returns the minimum count available If you send the MAX parameter the command returns the maximum count available Be sure to place a space between the command and the parameter Linking Commands To link IEEE 488 2 Common Commands with SCPI Commands use a semicolon between th
139. arameters to BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY NONE 8 BITS and FLOW FLOW NONE A GPIB card in your PC is not necessary if you are using RS 232 Const USING _RS232 0 Change 0 to 1 if RS 232 interface is to be used Sleep function declaration Declare Sub Sleep Lib Kernel32 ByVal s As Long Sub main Dim drm As Long Session to default resource manager Dim vi As Long Session to instrument Dim status As Long VISA function status return code Dim retStr As String 128 String returned from the instrument Dim str As String String for individual channel number On Error GoTo ErrorHandler Open default resource manager drm 1 status viOpenDefaultRM drm If status lt VI_SUCCESS Then GoTo VisaErrorHandler Select an interface for 3499A B C GPIB interface is used when USING_RS232 0 or RS 232 interface is used when USING RS232 1 If USING RS232 Then INST _ADDR ASRL1 INSTR Else INST _ADDR GPIBO 9 INSTR Endif Open a session to 3499A B C status viOpen drm INST_ADDR 0 0 vi If status lt VI_SUCCESS Then GoTo VisaErrorHandler 293 Chapter 8 Application Programs Visual BASIC Example Program Set RS 232 interface parameters when USING RS232 equals 1 If USING RS232 Then Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_ASRL BAUD 9600 Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_ASRL DATA BITS 8 Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_ASRL STOP BITS VI_ASRL_STOP_ONE Call viSetAttribut
140. ayed mode is half bright MODE 5 4 33 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Use a Digital I O Port 5 Press Enter to select the new mode The display changes to show the next menu level CONT POL POS 4 6 You may change other configuration parameters as desired using the same procedure When all desired configurations have been made press the Mode key to exit the configuration menu The CONFIG annunciator turns off To Configure a DIO Port You can configure an individual digital I O port to change the data polarity and the display format The following procedure changes the built in digital I O port to display in binary number format 1 Select a digital I O port i e port 090 The channel number is in the form of snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number DIN 090 2 Press the Mode key The CONFIG annunciator lights up in the display The first level menu is shown DATA POLARITY 090 3 Turn the knob to select the second menu level DISP FORMAT 090 4 Press Enter to select the format parameter DECIMAL 090 34 Note Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Use a Digital I O Port 5 Turn the knob until the desired data display format i e BINARY is displayed BINARY 090 6 Press Enter to make the change and return to the first level of the Mode menu DISP FORMAT 401 7 Press
141. been removed from the instrument Unable to store scan is running Slot number out of range The specified slot number is invalid The channel number has the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number Example OPEN 604 Data out of range The data for some commands is invalid Example SOUR DIG DATA BYTE VAL 266 valid data should be 0 255 170 112 113 114 115 116 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 300 501 502 503 Chapter 6 Error Messages Instrument Errors Not able to perform requested operation The requested operation is not valid for the instrument Example FUNC 3 BIWIRE2 the module in Slot 3 is not an N2260A Block name not exist In the 3499A B C a maximum two blocks can be defined The two defined blocks can be read and written etc If you read or write a block that has not been previously defined this error occurs Block name already exist The instrument has detected a defined block name while you are to define it once more Two Blocks already exist The instrument has detected two defined block names while you are to define them once more Channel number out of range The specified channel number is invalid for the module in the selected slot The channel number has the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number Example ROUT CLOSE 156 Scan list is empty Scan initiated Scan init ignored Trig ignored Hard
142. c rms oe Uren Per Module 4 A dc or ac rms Maximum P j Per Channel 60 W dc 62 5 VA ac AS SREO Per Module 240 W dc 250 VA ac Thermal Offset lt 3 uV differential Initial Closed Channel lt 1Q9 Resistance Relay Life Mechanical 108 at 36000 operations hour eu ee Electrical 5 x 10 1A load Maximum Scan Rate 80 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION with te rminal block Open Channel Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 o Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 0 with 1 channel closed HI LO lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 o with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 o lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 a with 1 channel closed 313 Chapter 9 Specifications N2265A Multifunction Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE without terminal block Open Channel Channel Channel lt 7pF Capacitance with 1 channel closed HEO lt 25 pF Channel Chassis lt 40 pF Insertion Loss 100 KHZ lt 0 10 dB with 509 termination DMZ lt 0 20 dB 10 MHz lt 0 60 dB Crosstalk 100 Bie lt 76 dB with 502 termination Ce lt 56 dB 10 MHz lt 33 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 16 bit Digital I O Function I O LINES
143. cards of the same type or cancel a pair See page 129 117 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference CPAir Query the paired cards See page 129 FUNCtion lt slot gt lt 1 2 3 4 WIRE1 WIRE2 BIWIRE2 WIRE4 gt Set function mode for N2260A See page 130 FUNCtion lt slot gt Query the function mode for N2260A See page 130 ROUTe continued OPEN lt channel_list gt ALL Open one multiple or all channels See page 128 OPEN lt channel_ list gt Query channels open state See page 128 SCAN LIST lt scan_list gt Set a sequence of channels to be scanned See page 182 SCAN LIST Query the scan list See page 132 SCAN CLEar Clear the scan list See page 132 SCAN SIZE Query the size of the scan list See page 132 sOURce DIGital MODE lt slot gt lt mode gt Set the digital I O mode See page 140 MODE lt slot gt Query the digital I O mode See page 140 CONTrol POLarity lt slot gt lt polarity gt Set the polarity of control lines See page 141 CONTrol POLarity lt slot gt Query the polarity of control lines See page 141 FLAG POLarity lt slot gt lt polarity gt Set the polarity of flag lines See page 141 re z z i D G O O FLAG POLarity lt slot gt Query the polarity of flag lines See page 141 118 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 3499A B C SCPI Alphabetical Reference SOURce DIGital contin
144. ch channels digital bits or stored channel states see page 106 The scan_list has the form snn where s is the slot number and nn isa specific channel number For all mainframes slot 0 refers to the 3499A B C control board Valid slot numbers are 3499A slots 0 through 5 3499B slots 0 through 2 3499C slots 0 through 9 The channel numbers nn are plug in module dependent Channel numbers for specific plug in modules are listed on page 70 132 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Scanning Commands To create a scan list using a single channel use SCAN snn multiple channels use SCAN snn snn sequential channels use SCAN snn snn groups of sequential channels use SCAN snn snn snn snn or any combination of the above Any digital I O lines included in scan_list must be operating in handshake Mode 1 or 2 The 4 bit built in digital I O bits 091 094 can be included in a scan_list N2260A and N2266A The configuration must be specified before defining the channels or channel range to be scanned Page 130 describes the configuration The two tree relays s98 and s99 can not be included in a scan_list A scan list may contain up to 200 entries One channel setup regardless of its channel number is counted as one channel in a scan_list The ROUTe SCAN LIST query returns the sequence of channels included in the scan_list A comma delineated channel list is returned The list i
145. channels 10 16 and 19 are closed The display for a matrix module The top display is the row ROW 3 1 3 6 7 3 information indicating that the relays on Row 3 Columns 1 3 6 and 7 of the module in Slot 3 are closed The lower display PETTE 7 is the column information indicating that relays on column 3 row 0 and 3 are closed The display for a digital I O module The first 2 digits on the left DOMES SEAR E 00 in this case represents the L 8 bit port address Adding one to this value the H 8 bit port address is obtained Data with a trailing decimal point indicates that the last operation on that port was a WRITE data without a trailing decimal point indicates that the last operation on that port was a READ This display shows that the data last read from Port 401 is 255 and the data last written to Port 400 was 254 The top display is for the built in digital I O Port 090 controller Pie Ae 030 module and the data from the last operation The lower display indicates that data last written to the bit channel 091 is 0 DOUT 0 091 For a multifunction module the first function on the module is ROW 0 1 3 3 displayed then the next This display is an example of a multifunction module with matrix and DIO functions in slot 5 00 H255 L254 5 81 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Switching a Relay Channel S
146. channels as follows a single channel use snn multiple channels use snn snn sequential channels use snn snn groups of sequential channels use snn snn snn snn or any combination of the above The channel_list parameter may also contain the tree switching relays numbered as 598 and 599 for the N2260A and N2266A modules The DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes query returns the number of cycles for the specified channel or channels For modules or channels that cannot respond to the query 1 is returned For multiple channels the returned value is a series of comma separated integers in the same order as the channel_list The DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes MAX query returns the maximum relay cycle count for a module in the specified slot The returned integer value is the maximum relay cycle count among all the relays on the specified module The returned value does not indicate the channel number with the maximum count The DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes CLEar command resets the relay cycle counter of the specified channel s This command resets the relay cycle count back to zero Use this command when replacing a relay with a new one 155 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference System Level Control Commands System Level Control Commands These commands allow you to synchronize the instrument to the bus controller reset the instrument and control the display OPC OPC This command and q
147. ching The two independent groups of VHF Switch bidirectional 1x4 switches with Module 50 characteristic impedance can be used for signals from DC to 300 MHz 44478A B 5090 759 1 3 GHz 1 Latching The two independent groups of Multiplexer bidirectional 1x4 switches with 500 75 characteristic impedance can be used for signals from DC to 1 3 GHz 63 Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview GP Modules The GP General Purpose relay modules often consist of independent latching or non latching relays They are useful for creating additional isolation between circuits providing safety interlocks actuating other relays or circuits or building special topologies such as binary ladders and tree structures A simple 4 channel SPST Single pole Single throw GP switch is shown below v O 0 Ly H01 CHOT G H 7 o o L 0 CH02 CHO2 os es o o L HO D cH03 CHO3 ee O oO Ly H04 CH04 ei O E A Simple General Purpose Switch The table below lists the available GP relay modules Model Mainframe Rela Number Module Name Slots T ad Description Required yP N2261A_ 40 Channel GP 1 Latching The 40 independent SPST relays Relay Module provide quality connections for low level signals Can also switch signals up to 200V 1A N2267A_ 8 Channel 1 Non An 8 channel High Current GP module High Current latchin
148. closed lt 40 C 95 RH gt 10 Q a Using the 44474A external increment amp channel closed display off 335 Chapter 9 Specifications 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Capacitance Open Channel lt 7 pF with 1 channel closed Channel Channel lt 10 pF Channel Chassis lt 25 pF Insertion Loss 100 kHz lt 0 20 dB with 502 termination Vine lt 0 25 dB 10 MHz lt 1dB Crosstalk LOO Ne lt 71 dB with 50Q termination cee lt 51 dB 10 MHz lt 31 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 336 Chapter 9 Specifications 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels Dual 4 Chans Connector Type BNC Maximum Voltage Center Center or Center Low Low Chassis or Low Low 250 V dc 30 V ac rms or 42 V ac peak 42 V de Maximum Current Per Channel 30 mA dc 300 mA ac rms Thermal Offset Per Channel lt 15uV Characteristic Impedance 50 Q Initial Closed Channel lt 12 Resistance Relay Life Dry Load of lt 300 mA amp lt 10 V 10 Maximum Rated Load 10 Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION lt 40 C 95 RH gt 10 Q Between Any Two Points a Using Agi
149. crements of 0 001 seconds When power is applied the value is set to 0 MIN The ARM TIMer query returns the sweep to sweep interval in seconds The returned number is a value between 0 and 99999 999 seconds The optional parameters MIN and MAX allow you to query the module for these values instead of looking them up in the command reference MIN returns 0 and MAX returns 99999 TRIGger SOURce lt BUS EXTernal IMMediate TIMer MIX HOLD gt SOURCe This command specifies the event control source for the trigger layer A complete description of the trigger layer and how it relates to scanning begins on page 85 The TRIGger source can be specified to be one of the following BUS the scan advances after a TRG or GET is received EXTernal the scan list advances after an external trigger is received IMMediate the scan advances immediately after the previous channel is closed if no ROUTe CHANnel DELay value is set TIMer the scan advances after the timer interval MIX the scan advances after a BUS or EXTernal event occurs HOLD the sweep of the scan list starts when a TRIGger IMMediate command is received After the power is applied or a reset RST command is received the default TRIGger source is IMMediate The TRIGger SOURce query returns a string Possible values retuned include BUS EXTernal IMMediate TIMer MIX or HOLD 135 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Referenc
150. ction circuitry designed to prevent the module temperature from rising too high The N2267A can potentially be switching up to 64 A 8 channels at 8 A The temperature control circuitry prevents dangerous overheating The 8 channels of the N2267A are independent more than one channel can be closed or opened at the same time Exceeding the maximum switching current of 8 Ampere on any channel will damage the N2267A module and possibly the system Specifications for the N2267A are given on page 317 Temperature Control The temperature control circuitry includes two sensor ICs and a cooling fan When the temperature of the N2267A reaches 45 C 113 F the cooling fan on the module turns on If the temperature drops below 40 C 104 F the fan turns off Over temperature Protection If the module temperature rises to 75 C 167 F all channels on the module are opened and a TTL level warning output connected via SMB on the rear panel will change from high to low This output can be used to drive an external LED or buzzer The warning output will reset change from low to high when the module temperature drops below 59 C 188 F The over temperature protection is controlled by hardware logic on the module Therefore if the over temperature protection has opened all the channels on the module the mainframe front panel and system memory will still indicate the original state of the channels To regain control of the ch
151. data directly into memory Two independent blocks of memory can be used A power on or reset RST command clears all defined memory blocks SOURce DIGital TRACe DEFine lt sys_mem name gt lt size gt lt fill gt DEFine lt sys_mem name gt DEFine CATalog The SOURce DIGital TRACe DEFine command defines a memory block for use The sys_mem_name parameter is a string containing up to 12 characters that names the memory block size defines the number of bytes to use for the block memory You can specify memory size from 1 to 32768 bytes If two memory blocks are being defined using two SOURce DIGital TRACe DEFine commands the total memory size defined must not exceed 32768 bytes If the fill parameter is used it puts a value into each of the bytes defined in size The value of fill can range from 0 to 255 0 to FF The SOURce DIGital TRACe DEFine query returns the size of the memory data block in bytes The returned value can range from 1 to 32768 The SOURce DIGital TRACe CATalog query returns a string containing the name s of defined memory blocks If two memory blocks are defined the sting contains both names separated by a comma SOURce DIGital TRACe DELete NAME lt sys_ mem name gt DELete ALL These commands remove a memory block previously defined With the sys_mem_name parameter only one block is removed The ALL form of the command removes all defined memory blocks 145 Chapter
152. de diameter 1 17mm 0 046 Maximum Component Height above board 12 7mm 0 5 Maximum lead Length below board 3 2mm 0 125 E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 42 V dc 30 V ac rms 42 V ac peak Maximum Voltage on breadboard area 5 5 V on digital input port lines Maximum Power Dissipation Per Module 2 Watts 342 Chapter 9 Specifications 44475A Breadboard Module 104mm 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 ooooo 20000 2000 e000 ooo ooo oo oo o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o oo oo ooo ooo e000 0000 0000 ooooo 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000 0 0000000000000000000000000000000 00000 00000 oooo 0000 ooo ooo oo oo o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o oo oa ooo ooo oooo o000 00000 ooooo Oobooooooooooooooooooooo00000000 74mm 74mm 2 198mm 175mm g pto O00 O00 O000 GRID HOLE SPACING 2 54mm 14 E R HE ath GRID HOLE INSIDE DIAMETER 1 417mm 046 343 Chapter 9 Specifications 44476A Microwave Switch Module 44476A Microwave Switch Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Frequency Range DC to 18 GHz Characteristic Impedance 50 Q Input Power Rating 1 Watt average 100 Watts peak Also less than 7 V dc Average Switch Life 108 Repeatability
153. description RS 232 DTR DSR 48 None 48 RTS CTS 48 XON XOFF 48 FP1 7 26 FP2 7 26 Front Panel 4 front panel display general description 5 on off 110 text message 110 Front Panel Operation 28 function mode N2260A module 1 wire mode 178 2 wire mode 178 4 wire mode 178 dual 2 wire mode 178 G GP modules general information 64 GPIB IEEE 488 address selection 47 connector 6 7 interface configuration 46 H handshake mode description DIO modules default 99 full handshake mode 5 102 read and write strobe mode 4 101 read or write and strobe Mode 8 100 static mode 1 99 static mode 2 99 handshake mode description RS 232 DTR DSR 48 None 48 RTS CTS 48 XON XOFF 48 high current relays N2264A module 192 high speed switching 84 I idle state 86 IEEE 488 2 commands 161 INITiate 92 138 Inoperative instrument 16 instrument firmware revision 52 idle state 87 local remote state 54 mounting onto rack 23 power on 29 power on failure 16 power on process 15 power on state setting 44 recall state 107 serial number 53 state storage 106 store state 107 system mode selection 112 unpacking amp inspection 15 viewing errors 36 instrument errors 170 Insulation Displacement Connector 278 351 interface GPIB IEEE 488 address selection 47 interface RS 232 baud rate 48 49 data bits 48 50 default setting 48 flow control 48 50 parity 48 50 setting 48 L linking commands 163 local 54 LWORD 1
154. digital I O operation refer to Digital I O Operation on page 95 139 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Digital I O Commands Digital Configuration Commands These commands set the digital I O handshake mode handshake line polarities and data line polarities The port parameter is in the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the first channel on the digital port The port parameter is plug in module dependent Valid port numbers for each plug in module are shown beginning on page 70 SOURce DIGital MODE lt port gt lt mode gt MODE lt port gt This command sets the handshake mode to use Five handshake modes are available and are specified as an integer from 1 to 5 See About Flow Control Modes Handshake on page 98 The modes are shown below Mode Handshake Number Mode Notes Definition 1 Static mode 1 Default handshake mode 2 Static mode 2 Read what was written Read or Write If you seta port to this mode you cannot use the 3 strobe port in a scan list or use card pairing ROUTe CPAir If you set a port to this mode you cannot use the Read and write f f u strobe port in a scan list or use card pairing ROUTe CPAir If you set a port to this mode you cannot use the 5 Full handshake port in a scan list or use card pairing ROUTe CPAir Only the first port on a digital I O module can be set to mode 8 mode 4 or mode 5 When set to m
155. e Scanning Commands TRIGger TIMer lt seconds gt MIN MAX TIMer MIN MAX This command sets the channel to channel interval in the trigger layer the ARM TIMer command sets the sweep to sweep interval in the trigger layer This timer is valid only if the TIMer is set using the TRIGger SOURce command You can set seconds to any value between 0 000 MIN and 99999 999 MAX in increments of 0 001 seconds When power is applied the value is set to 0 MIN The TRIGger TIMer query returns the channel to channel interval in seconds The returned number is a value between 0 and 99999 999 seconds The optional parameters MIN and MAX allow you to query the module for these values instead of looking them up in the command reference MIN returns 0 and MAX returns 99999 ROUTe CHANnel DELay lt seconds gt lt channel_ list gt ALL CHANnel DELay lt channel list gt This command specifies a delay time from 0 to 99999 999 seconds with 1 ms resolution between when a channel in the scan list is closed and the next operation begins and if configured a trigger out pulse is sent The delay time can be set individually for each channel in the scan list or one delay can be set for all channels in the scan list Note that even if the trigger source is set to IMMediate the scan list will not advance until the delay time is met Following power on or a reset RST command the delay time is set to 0 The cha
156. e nate with 1 channel closed a Channel Chassis lt 50 pF Insertion Loss 100 kHz 0 1 dB with 509 termination 1 MHz 0 2 dB Crosstalk 100 kHz 70 dB with 509 termination 1 MHz 50 dB E Environmental Conditions Operating Pollution Degree 2 Operating Altitude 3000 meters 10 000 ft Measurement Category 1 1500 Vpk transient 500 V over voltage transient Operating Temperature 0 55 C Operating Humidity lt 80 RH 0 C 40 C non condensing a With chassis of all instruments connected and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 322 Chapter 9 Specifications N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 1 to 9 Relay Type Latching Connector Type BNC Maximum Switching Voltage 24 VDC Maximum Switching Current 1A Maximum Switching Power 24 W Characteristic Impedance 509 Relay Life Mechanical 5x10 yene Electrical 1A24VDC 108 E DC CHARACTERISTICS Offset Voltage mV 8 0 Initial Closed Channel 0 8 Resistance Q 25 C 40 RH Open Ch Ch Ch 1010 f Ch Chassis Ch Center 1010 Insulation Resistance Q 40 C 80 RH Open Ch Ch Ch 10 Ch Chassis Ch Center 10 323 Chapter 9 N2272A 1 Specifications GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module
157. e 62 simplified schematic 177 specifications 303 N2261A module channel numbering 70 description 64 182 relay type 64 simplified schematic 182 specifications 305 N2262A module channel numbering 70 description 66 185 relay type 66 simplified schematic 185 specifications 307 N2263A module channel numbering 71 description 67 188 simplified schematic 189 specifications 309 N2264A module Caution 194 channel numbering 71 description 68 192 relay type 68 simplified schematic 193 specifications 310 N2265A module channel numbering 71 description 68 196 relay type 68 simplified schematic 196 specifications 313 352 N2266A module channel numbering 71 configuration 202 description 62 200 pinout 205 relay type 62 simplified schematic 201 wiring 204 N2267A module channel numbering 71 description 64 206 pinout 209 protection network 207 relay type 64 simplified schematic 208 specifications 317 temperature control 206 wiring 208 N2268A module channel numbering 71 description 62 210 relay type 62 simplified schematic 210 specifications 319 N2270A module channel numbering 72 description 62 212 relay type 62 simplified schematic 212 specifications 321 wiring 213 N2272A module channel numbering 72 connecting multiple 216 description 63 214 relay type 63 simplified schematic 215 Specifications 323 wiring 215 N2276A module channel numbering 72 configuration 219 description 217 simplified schematic 218
158. e TTL compatible The 32 I O bits can be addressed as 32 individual 1 bit ports four independent 8 bit ports two independent 16 bit ports or one 32 bit port The four 8 bit ports are completely independent of each other and may be used separately For example two of the ports can be used for output operations while the other two ports are used for input operations However all 8 bits in a given port must be either input or output bits not a combination of input and output Five handshaking modes are available for this module The handshaking modes are described beginning on page 98 Handshaking uses up to three control lines Peripheral Control PCTL T O direction I O Peripheral Flag PFLG Port and bit numbering is show in the table below Note that the ports are numbered differently if you are using the 3488 System mode System 32 Bit Port 16 Bit Port 8 Bit Port Bit Mode PORT 00 Bits 0 7 PORT 00 PORT 01 Bits 8 15 SCPI mode PORT 00 PORT 02 Bits 16 23 PORT 02 PORT 03 Bits 24 31 PORT 00 Bits 0 7 PORT 04 PORT 01 Bits 8 15 3488A Mode PORT 06 PORT 02 Bits 16 23 PORT 05 PORT 03 Bits 24 31 Specification for the N2268A are given on page 309 188 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2263A 32 bit Digital I O Module N2263A Simplified Schematic The N2263A consists of 32 bidirectional I O channels each of which includes digital in and digital out ci
159. e commands For example RST CONF EXT OUTP ON or TRIG SOUR HOLD TRG To link multiple SCPI commands use both a semicolon and a colon between the commands For example ARM COUN 1 TRIG SOUR EXT 163 164 Error Messages Error Messages First error in queue Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them When you have read all errors from the queue the ERROR annunciator turns off and the errors are cleared The instrument beeps once each time an error is generated If more than 10 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with 350 Queue overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue is cleared by the CLS clear status command or when power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the queue The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset RST command or a card module reset SYSTem CPON command Front Panel Operation If the ERROR annunciator is on press View select ERROR and press Enter Use the knob to scroll through the error numbers Press the arrow key right to view the text of the error message All errors are cleared when you exit the menu
160. e vi VI_ATTR_ASRL FLOW CNTRL VI_ASRL_FLOW NONE Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_ASRL PARITY VI_ASRL PAR NONE End If Set the 3499A B C to SCPI mode Call viVPrintf vi SYSMODE SCPI Chr 10 0 Call Sleep 4000 Wait 4 seconds Reset the instrument to a known state Call viVPrintf vi RST Chr 10 0 Call Sleep 4000 Close channels 100 through 103 Call viVPrintf vi CLOSE 100 103 Chr 10 0 Open channels 100 through 103 Call viVPrintf vi OPEN 100 103 Chr 10 0 Scanning setup the following commands make the instrument scan channels 100 through 103 two times The channels are scanned continuously and the second scan sweep starts 1 second after the start of the first scan sweep Create a scan list 100 through 103 Call viVPrintf vi SCAN 100 103 Chr 10 0 Set arm source to TIMER Call viVPrintf vi ARM SOURCE TIMER Chr 10 0 Interval time between two scan sweeps is 1 second Call viVPrintf vi ARM TIMER 1 Chr 10 0 Set scan sweep two times Call viVPrintf vi ARM COUNT 2 Chr 10 0 Set trigger source to IMM default Call viVPrintf vi TRIG SOURCE IMM Chr 10 0 Set trigger source to IMM default Call viVPrintf vi CHAN DELAY 0 100 103 Chr 10 0 Start scanning Call viVPrintf vi INIT Chr 10 0 Set visa time out value to 10 seconds Call viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_TMO V
161. ectIO As DirectIO Private Sub Forml_Load ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles MyBase Load Create DirectIO object myDirectIO New DirectIO GPIBO 9 INSTR False 2000 myDirectIO Timeout 2000 End Sub Private Sub Selftestbtn Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Selftestbtn Click Send TST Selftest command to the 3499 myDirectIO WriteLine tst Timing Delay 10000000 Read results Dim Results As String Results myDirectIO Read Textbox1 Text Results End Sub Private Sub Results TextChanged ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Textbox1 TextChanged End Sub 296 Chapter 8 Application Programs VB net Example Program This example closes opens multiple switches within a 4x4 Matrix The switches can be controlled within one command line or listed separtely Private Sub Closebtn Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Closebtn Click myDirectIO WriteLine CLOS 120 123 End Sub Private Sub Openbtn_Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Openbtn Click myDirectIO WriteLine OPEn 120 myDirectIO WriteLine OPEn 123 End Sub Digital Input Output on power up or after Reset all Digital I O ports in the 3499 will be input ports Mode 1 is default mode Private Sub DigIObtn Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e
162. ed Channel lt 1Q Resistance Mechanical 108 Relay Life at 36000 operations hour Electrical 5 x 10 1A load Maximum Scan Rate 80 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION with terminal block Open Channel Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 o Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 1090 with 1 channel closed HI LO lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 1 o with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 o with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 307 Chapter 9 Specifications N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE without terminal block Capacitance Open channel Channel Channel lt 7 pF with 1 channel closed ee lt 30 pF Channel Chassis lt 50 pF Insertion Loss 100 eee lt 0 10 dB with 502 termination 1 MHZ lt 0 20 dB 10 MHz lt 0 60 dB Crosstalk 100 pie lt 73 dB with 509 termination 1 MPZ lt 53 dB 10 MHZ lt 28 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with Low Terminal of the input connected to Low Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 308 Chapter 9 Specifications N2263A 32 bit Digital I O Module N2268A 32 bit Digital I O Module I O LINES Bit Number 32 Maximum Voltage Line Chassis 42 V de Maximum Sink Current Per Bit 600 mA saa Vout high gt 2 4V
163. ed on the module two 16 pin connectors labeled as switchO amp switch1 for connecting switches and two 10 pin connectors labeled as attenuator0 amp attenuator1 for connecting attenuators The Agilent N2276B can only be used with the SCPI Mode of 3499A B C Firmware Revision 3 0 or later See page 59 for details about the firmware revisions The driving circuitry of the module is capacitive Turn off power before installing or removing the module switches or attenuators Specifications for the N2276B are given on page 325 221 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module The following switches and attenuators are available from Agilent Switches 1x4 SP4T Agilent 87104A Agilent 87104B Agilent 87104C Switches 1x6 SP6T Agilent 87106A Agilent 87106B Agilent 87106C dc to 4 GHz dc to 20 GHz dc to 26 5 GHz dc to 4 GHz dc to 20 GHz dc to 26 5 GHz External Attenuators up to two may be used 0 to 11 dB in 1 dB steps Agilent 84904K Agilent 84904L 0 to 90 dB in 10 dB steps Agilent 84906K Agilent 84906L 0 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps Agilent 84907K Agilent 84907L up to 26 5 GHz up to 40 GHz up to 26 5 GHz up to 40 GHz up to 26 5 GHz up to 40 GHz 222 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module Configuration An 8 bit DIP switch labeled S100 on the N2276B is used to configure optional switches and attenuators The following table sho
164. ed to determine which bits in the event register can be recorded in the OPR summary bit bit 7 of the Status Byte register unmask can range from 0 to 16348 but is only applicable to the 3499A B C with the values 1 2 and 16 For example sending STATus OPERation ENABle 16 sets the OPR summary bit in the Status Byte Register to be true 1 when a scan has started The query form of this command returns a decimal weighted value indicating the currently set bits in this register STATus PRESet This command clears the Operation Status Register enable register bits All Enable bits are set to 0 This command does not affect the other register groups and does not clear the event register 150 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Status System Commands The Standard Event Register The Standard Event Register reports instrument events errors and the OPC command The Standard Event Register reports through the ESB bit bit 5 in the Status Byte Register ESR This query returns a decimal weighted value of the event register The values in this register are as follows Bit Number Decimal Definition Value Power has been turned on since the last time the register was cleared read 1 Not Used 2 Returns 0 A command syntax error occurred error 0 Power On 1 2 Command Error 4 numbers in the 100 range An execution error occurred 3 Execution Eror 8 error numbers in the 200 range A self
165. efore the cost is reduced by minimizing the number of mainframes and modules required Each separate function on a multifunction module can be operated independently For example an Agilent N2265A can be used as both a 4x 4 matrix module and a 16 bit digital I O module The table below lists the available multifunction modules Mainframe Fast Module Name Slots Pelay Description umber Type Required N2264A 12 Channel GP 1 Non The module provides 12 channel 3 Channel High latching SPST Single pole Single throw current GP GP relays for signals up to 200 V 1 16 Bit Digital I O A 3 channel high current GP Module relays for signals up to 125 V 5A and 16 bit digital I O for sensing and control of external devices up to 42 V 600 mA N2265A 4 x 4 Matrix 1 Latching The module provides 4 x 4 2 wire 16 Bit Digital I O matrix for signals up to 200V 1A Module and 16 bit digital I O for sensing and control of external devices up to 42 V 600 mA 68 Optical Modules The Agilent N2280A N2281A and N2282A are optical switch modules Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview The table below lists the information about these three optical modules Mainframe ee Module Name Slots a Description Required YP N2280A Optical Switch Quad 1 to 2 Non Four 1 to 2 Optical 2 MUX Module latching Switches N2281A Optical Switch Dual 1 to 2 Non Two 1 to 4 Optical 4 MU
166. elect the first channel for the list e g 108 SELECT 103 4 Press Enter to add the channel into the scan list The starburst character lights in the display to indicate the channel is now a part of the scan list SELECT 103 38 Step Step Scan Clear Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation Scanning Operation 5 Repeat step 3 and 4 to add additional channels to the list 6 When the desired channels have been added press the S List key again to return to the first level of the menu ADD TO SCAN 107 7 Press S List again to exit the menu The CONFIG annunciator turns off To Perform Scanning After the scan configuration is complete the actual scan can be performed 1 Press the Step key to close the first channel in the scan list 2 Press the Step key again to open the first channel and close the next channel in the list This procedure shows a simple way to scan one channel at a time for each press of a front panel key You can also press the Scan key to scan all channels in the list according to the various scan parameters set In the default parameter state pressing the Scan key will cause all the channels in the list to cycle through at the maximum possible speed While this occurs the SCAN annunciator is lighted For details about the scan parameters see page 85 To Clear a Scan List You can clear a scan list once it has been configured 1
167. em Overview An Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System is composed of a mainframe and a set of Plug in modules This chapter provides a typical configuration of a test system using the 3499A B C for switching and control followed by a description of the three mainframes and all the Plug in modules The following sections are included in this chapter Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System on page 57 Mainframes Overview on page 58 Firmware and Control Module Description on page 59 Plug in Modules Overview on page 61 Channel and Slot Addressing on page 70 Factory Default and Reset States on page 74 56 Chapter 3 System Overview Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System The Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System provides high density and high speed switching for routing test signals to and from your DUTs devices under test and test instruments such as external DMMs scopes counters power supplies etc Whether you are involved in a large production test system or a small R amp D bench top system the Agilent 3499A B C provides an ideal combination of price performance solution With a wide variety of available plug in modules you can configure your test system much more easily and flexibly The figure below shows the typical configuration of a test system ae 2 Instrument Device s IEEE488 2 GPIB Equipment A Typical Test Sy
168. emain closed Aborting a scan does not affect the present scan configuration A scan cannot resume from where it is interrupted To initiate a new scan the channels in the scan list will be scanned from the beginning of the scan list A scan list may contain up to 200 entries 85 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning The Scan Process The figure below illustrates how a scan works Idle a Initialize Controlled by Arm Source g Arm Layer Arm Event Controlled by i Arm Count Detection Controlled by Another Trigger Sourc Channel i Y w Controlled by Trigger Layer 4 Trigger Event A Scan List Detection Output Trigger Y yN Scan Channel Note The trigger out pulse will occur at the specified trig out line only if you have configured to enable the slot to output The scan operation consists of two layers arm layer and trigger layer The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever it is not operating within either of these layers When a scan is initiated the instrument is taken out of the idle state and proceeds into the arm layer When an arm source is detected the instrument leaves the arm layer and proceeds to the trigger layer In the trigger layer for each detected trigger source it advances one step in the scan list After advancing through all the channels bits in the scan list and reaching the arm count the scan i
169. ent BASIC 298 Annunciators 5 application program VB net 296 Visual BASIC 293 Visual C 291 application programs Agilent BASIC 298 Visual BASIC 293 ARM COUNt 134 COUNt 134 SOURce 134 SOURce 134 TIMer 135 TIMer 135 arm count selection 91 arm layer 87 arm source description 302 BUS 87 EXT 87 HOLD 87 IMM 87 MIX 87 TIMER 87 arm source selection 91 B Basic Operation 19 built in digital I O channel numbering 72 read from 31 104 specifications 302 write 105 write to 32 built in external trigger configuration 42 93 specifications 302 BYTE 104 C card pair 41 CC EI 93 channel addressing 19 close 21 82 monitoring 80 open 21 82 open all 22 channel list rules 79 115 channel number 19 clear scan list 89 close open relay channel 21 82 command reference alphabetical 116 functional 122 command separator 161 command syntax SCPI command format 161 Common Commands 161 CONFigure EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut 137 SOURce 137 SOURce 137 configure MUX module 83 connecting with screw terminal block 275 Connector GPIB 6 7 mini DIN 7 RS 232 6 7 Contact Agilent 8 convention front panel operation 28 78 SCPI command 79 115 cycle counts of relay 111 D data display format 96 default states 74 delay time setting 91 DIAGnostic DISPlay INFOrmation 158 STATe 158 STATe 158 MONitor 159 MONitor 159 RELay CYCLes CLEar 155 MAX 155 CYCLes 111 155 SPOKE 131 Digital I O configuration 95 default setting 104
170. equency Switching Modules N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Module N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX Module N2276A B Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module 44478A B 500 75Q 1 3 GHz Multiplexer 44476A 3 Channel 18 GHz Switch Module 44476B 2 Channel Microwave Switch Module Optical Switch Modules N2280A Optical Switch Quad 1 to 2 MUX Module N2281A Optical Switch Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module N2282A Optical Switch 1 to 8 MUX Module Digital I O Modules N2263A 32 Bit Digital I O Module 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module Multifunction Special Purpose Modules N2264A 12 Channel GP amp 3 Channel High current GP amp 16 Bit Digital I O N2265A 4 x 4 Matrix amp 16 Bit Digital I O Module 44475A Breadboard Module The Front Panel at a Glance ae Agilent Poptart Reset Stop Card Reset Mon Scan Open V Read 4 4 y N 5 Store Power Recan Y View Step Close V Write V o Local Clear Shift Mode s List Menu Enter 7 7 7 O 0 D 43 1 Power On Standby 8 Scan Keys see page 85 2 Reset Module Instrument 9 Main Menu 3 Shift Local 10 Open Close Relay Channels 4 Store Recall Instrument State 11 Enter a Value Confirm Selection 5 Monitor Channel Port Module 12 Read Write Digital I O Ports 6 View Menu 13 Knob 7 Mode Menu 14 Naviga
171. ernal Wiring The figure below shows the module s female BNC connectors and the channel group numbers The BNC connectors accept user supplied male BNC connectors Group 00 Group 10 Q 8 N isp e N mM Q oO 2 O oO y Zz d d 6 ad gd d go 6 ad g Z Z Ss Z Zz Zz Z Ss 2 Zz S S 5 5 FE F O O O O O O O O O O 00 01 COM00 02 03 11 COM10 12 COOQOO AACA 44478 MULTIPLEXER Terminations The figure on page 268 shows the SMB connectors on the main PC Board The SMB connectors allow you to connect SMB resistive terminations to any unused channels SMB resistive terminations are available from Agilent using the following part number 34585A set of four 50 Q terminations for the 44478A 34586A set of four 75 Q terminations for the 44478B To maintain proper operation unused channels should be terminated by plugging a 50 Q or 75 Q SMB type resistive termination 50 Q for 44478A and 75 Q for 44478B onto the male SMB connector provided for each channel 270 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules Cabling Considerations RG 223 U cable is recommended Ready made cables BNCs on both ends are available from Agilent using the following part numbers 8120 1838 30 cm 12 in 50 Q coaxial 8120 1839 61 cm 24 in 50 Q coaxial 8120 1840 122 cm 48 in 50 Q coaxial 5062 6452 30 cm 12 in 75 Q coaxial Always use shielded coax
172. executed See below STAT OPER ENAB 16 unmasks bit 4 Scan Start which can set the OPR bit in the Status Byte 148 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Status System Commands Each register group has one or more low level registers These low level registers are called condition event or enable registers and control the action of specific bits in the registers You read or write to the registers using binary weighted decimal numbers A condition register continuously monitors the state of the instrument The bits in the condition register are updated in real time they are not latched The 3499A B C uses a condition register as a part of the Operation Status Register An event register latches events from the condition register The 3499A B C has an event register as a part of the Operation Status Register and the Standard Event Register An enable register defines the bits in the event register that are reported to the Status Byte Register You can read or write to an enable register You read and write to the Standard Event Register and Status Byte Register using IEEE488 2 common commands The Operation Status Register uses SCPI commands You can read the status registers to determine the current operating state of the instrument You can use a technique called serial polling to periodically read the Status Byte Register and determine the operating state of the instrument You can also set the status system to generate
173. f all channels are opened 202 Caution Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module Dual 2 Wire Mode PC Board Modification To operate the module in the Dual 2 wire mode you must make modifications to the module s printed circuit board Specifically you must unsolder and remove relay T99 On the PC board T99 has a reference designator of KT240 The location of KT240 is shown below You must use proper anti static procedures de soldering techniques and equipment to prevent damage to the PC board Goaae A i 104 g Ja m A D000 ete ey SIE sya i S 109 e i T i i 3 aaae E g E a a g Bon op DEPE 000A cT JEg aeaaeae a ee e aea eaaa eae eee aeee eae e aeae GESEPEPEPEDEPEFEPEPELEBDELEDEDEPELESEPEDE 101 100 wha gt gt VA X f b Y VAA AAA lt RSP SIS VA SKE KY S XX KT240 203 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module N2266A Wiring Information There are four methods available to connect to the N2266A A screw terminal block the N2296A described on page 277 A direct wiring insulation displacement connector the N2296A described on page 278 A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable
174. g Voltage Terminal Terminal or Terminal Chassis 250 VAC 125 VDC Per Channel Maximum Switchin Oo voc ara KA RIrER g 30 125 Vdc at 0 24A 0 24 A aaa 0 250 Vac 8A Per Module 64 A Maximum Switching Per Channel 2000 VA 150 W Power Per Module 16000 VA 1200 W Thermal Offset Per Channel 3 uV Initial Closed Channel lt 0 08 Q Resistance a Mechanical 5 x10 at 180 cpm Relay Life Electrical 105 Maximum Scan Rate 20 Chans sec E DC CHARACTERISTICS Open Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 1010 Q Channel Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 Q lt 40 C 80 RH gt 109 Q with 1 channel closed 317 Chapter 9 Specifications N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module E AC CHARACTERISTICS Capacitance Open Channel Channel Channel lt 10 pF with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 10 pF Insertion Loss 100 kHz 0 10 dB with 509 termination 1 MHz 0 20 dB Crosstalk 100 kHz 75 dB with 50Q termination 1 MHz 55 dB E Environmental Conditions Operating Pollution 2 Degree Operating Altitude 3000 meters 10 000 ft Measurement 1 1500 Vpk transient 500 V over voltage transient Category Operating 0 55 C Temperature Operating Humidity lt 80 RH 0 C to 40 C non condensing a With chassis of all instruments connected and with L
175. g which can switch up to 8A 250VAC or GP Module 5A 30VDC with decreasing current to 1A at 125VDC 44471A 10 Channel GP 1 Latching The 10 independent SPST Single Relay Module pole Single throw relays provide quality connections for low level signals Can also switch signals up to 250V 2A 64 Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview Model Mainframe Raay Number Module Name Slots Type Description Required 44471D_ 20 Channel GP 1 Latching The 20 independent SPST Single Relay Module pole Single throw relays provide quality connections for low level signals Can also switch signals up to 250V 1A 44475A Breadboard 1 NA Use the breadboard for custom circuits Module and special purpose functions in your test system 44476A 3 Channel 18 1 Latching The 3 independent 509 SPDT Single GHz Switch pole Double throw coaxial switches Module with SMA connectors provide high isolation low insertion loss and low VSWR for switching signals up to 18 GHz 44476B 2 Channel 1 NA Similar to the 44476A but does not Microwave have the coaxial switches installed Switch Module A variety of coaxial switches can be mounted onto the module to provide 3 4 or 5 port switching up to 26 5 GHz 44477A 7 Channel 1 Latching 7 independent break before make Form C Relay SPDT Form C relays for general Module purpose switching and control of external devices up to 250V 2A
176. gilent N2276A Please refer to the switch or attenuator data sheets for information specific to each switch and attenuator Only one channel in a switch may be closed at a time Closing a channel will open any previously closed channel 87106A B C 9 9 9 9 a w N O 218 Configuration An 8 bit DIP switch labeled S100 on the N2276A is used to configure the switches and optional attenuators The following table shows specific configurations If the 8 bit DIP switch s configuration does not match the switches or attenuators installed errors or unexpected results will occur Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module 100 1 on i E 7 6 4 3 2 i 0 T 18 Attenuator Switch Attenuator 1 Attenuator 0 Switch 1 Switch 0 Bit Setting Bit 7 6 Bit 5 4 Bit 3 2 Bit 1 0 00 None None None None 01 84904K L 84904K L 87104A B C 87104A B C 10 84906K L 84906K L 87106A B C 87106A B C 11 84907K L 84907K L Reserved Reserved 219 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module N2276A Wiring Information All the microwave switches for the N2276A have SMA female connectors For the attenuators each standard 84904 6 7L model offers two female 2 4 mm connectors and each 84904 6 7L model wi
177. h slot numbers When a command is sent to one of the paired cards that command is executed on both cards in succession lowest slot number first The card pair feature is especially useful when doing 4 wire scanning Only two identical plug in modules can be paired Modules that can be paired include the switching modules MUX GP and Matrix the digital I O modules and the multifunction modules The slot 0 refers to the 3499A B C control board Valid slot numbers are 3499A slots 1 through 5 3499B slots 1 through 2 3499C slots 1 through 9 After two switching modules are paired opening closing scanning one or more channels on either one of the paired modules will result in the same operation on the respective channels on the other module being performed at the same time The N2260A and N2266A are configurable MUX modules Only when both modules are configured to the same function can the two modules be paired Once paired changing the function of one module will be duplicated on the other module in the pair Page 130 gives additional details about the N2260A and N2266A configuration You can pair DIO modules if they are used in handshake Mode 1 or 2 but not in Mode 8 or 4 or 5 Once paired writing data on either one of the paired modules will write the data on the other module You can cancel a card pair by specifying a 1 for the second lt slot gt parameter There will be no paired cards after an instrument power
178. handshaking modes are described beginning on page 98 Handshaking uses up to three control lines Peripheral Control PCTL I O direction I O Peripheral Flag PFLG Port and bit numbering is show in the table below Note that the ports are numbered differently if you are using the 3488 System mode Operating Mode 16 Bit Port 8 Bit Port Bit PORT 40 Bits 40 47 SCPI mode PORT 40 PORT 41 Bits 48 55 PORT 40 Bits 40 47 3488A Mode PORT 42 PORT 41 Bits 48 55 Specifications for the N2265A are shown on page 3138 N2265A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic of the N2265A is shown on the next page The N2265A is separated into two sections the 4 x 4 2 wire matrix and the 16 bit digital I O A channel on the N2265A refers to an individual crosspoint on the matrix or an individual bit on the 16 bit digital I O 196 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2265A Multifunction Module ie f i t i Zz 7 a l i ZG z0 z0 i 1 Z2uy Zuy Zuy i i ZZO ZZO S20 I i ZO rzZ EZO l So z a 2 woz wos wor a FOD Fom fom 2 2 2 2 Zz EE S S Pu Ta T T d 3 l f loko foo ZO i w i Za 4 zZ i a i 1 i o i o Ye Nye Nee Nog e E EE a Ea SiG Z z 7 i S zo BAN zA A re gt O i Ya New Nea Ys oe 3 9 u s EN EN 8 ag 3 3 oO e f 1 We v v i Dran R sA ho A
179. hannel 29 and group 4 channel 30 through channel 39 Additional information about parallel switching is given on page 84 Specifications for the N2266A are given on page 315 In order to stay within the 20W power limit set for convection cooling no more than three 3 N2266A 40 Channel MUX Modules should be installed in an Agilent 3499A mainframe the remaining two slots must remain empty Other module combinations are acceptable for example two N2266A MUX modules plus any combination of other Agilent modules is permissible This limitation does not apply to the 3499B or 3499C mainframes 200 N2266A Simplified Schematic Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module The 40 2 wire channel relays CH00 CH89 are divided into two banks BANK 0 and BANK 1 Each bank consists of 20 2 wire switching channels and a common bus COMO amp COM1 There is also a single ended common terminal SE COM used when the multiplexer is configured to 80 channel 1 wire mode The two tree relays T98 and T99 are used to configure the N2260A a eet teeny et steed dade tase AE DEN A PEE T N E Terminal Block o ____ gt _ H CHOO gt H CHOS lt 2e Do H CH10 H CH19 T98 o 2 COMO FH gt oL ot cS S 8 L COMI L CHOO CHO9 BANK 0 CH10 CH19 SE COM CH20 CH29 BANK 1 CH30 7 CH39 201 Note Note Note Chapter 7 Plug i
180. he scan will continue after a BUS or EXTernal event occurs HOLD the sweep of the scan list starts when a TRIGger IMMediate command is received After the power is applied or a reset RST command is received the default ARM source is IMMediate The ARM SOURce query returns a string Possible values retuned include BUS EXTernal IMMediate TIMer MIX or HOLD ARM COUNt lt number gt MIN MAX INFinity COUNt MIN MAX INFinity This command sets the number of times the scan list is performed MIN specifies a single sweep MAX specifies 99 999 sweeps and INF continues sweeping the scan list indefinitely until an ABORt command is received Following power on or a reset RST command the ARM COUNt is set to 1 MIN The ARM COUNt query returns the number of scanning cycles set by ARM COUNt The optional parameters MIN and MAX allow you to query the module for these values instead of looking them up in the command reference MIN returns 1 MAX returns 99999 and INF returns 1 134 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Scanning Commands ARM TIMer lt seconds gt MIN MAX TIMer MIN MAX This command sets the sweep to sweep interval in the arm layer the TRIGger TIMer command sets the channel to channel interval in the trigger layer This timer is valid only if the TIMer is set using the ARM SOURce command You can set seconds to any value between 0 000 MIN and 99999 999 MAX in in
181. he specific plug in module wiring information for details about the connector and pin out assignments N2297A DIN96 TO TWIN D50 CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTOR 1 vs 96 PIN DIN PIN 1 16 A1 A16 1 ea B1 B16 C1 C16 CONNECTOR 1 CONNECTION 96 pin female DIN connector on the DIN to D cable CONNECTOR 2 vs 96 PIN DIN PIN 1 16 A17 A32 1 B17 B32 n e o 2 a 2 w 2 a o R N N A 2 R q Rg amp KR A 2 8 2 Q o 8 5 x S C17 C32 CONNECTOR 2 indicates that the pin is not used 279 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information N2298A DIN96 to D25 Cable The N2298A is a female DIN96 to a male Sub D25 Cable The cable uses 26 AWG wire which meets UL AWM 2464 with overall foil shield The maximum voltage is 200 volts per wire The figure below shows the connections between the D96 and the Sub D250 Refer to the N2262A module wiring information page 186 for details about the connector and pin out assignments omga j 1 eee oo 0 CONNECTION alleee i COO QV LL LL LLL LLL o eee 000 o t i ale i oook SUB D DIN _ vlleee looo l 3 g o C1 i T oloo o i fooolls 8 EPN 1 2 631 Z illeee ooo a 3 C5 r i 2 ol ooo oool le amp MALE 1 4 c7 o o oje oo ooole 3 15 C10
182. high speed switching and digital I O capability Switch Control System Features Intuitive and easy to use user interface GPIB EEE 488 or RS 232 interface control External triggering capability Built in 4 bit digital I O port Store and recall up to 50 customized instrument setups SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments compatibility Relay cycle count information for preventive maintenance Downloadable firmware upgrades Agilent 3499A Features Five plug in slots Full rack width Agilent 3499B Features Two plug in slots Half rack width Agilent 3499C Features Nine plug in slots Full rack width Note Unless otherwise indicated this manual applies to all Serial Numbers Plug in Modules at a Glance The Agilent 3499A B C mainframes support a variety of plug in modules to make test system configuration easy Each module is described in more detail later in this manual Multiplexer Modules N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module armature relays N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module reed relays N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module 44470A 10 Channel MUX Module 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module General Purpose Relay Modules N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module 44477A 7 Channel Form C Relay Module Matrix Modules N2262A 4 x 8 Matrix Module 44473A 4x 4 Matrix Module High Fr
183. his damage Either an RC network or a varistor can effectively absorb the high voltage surge The specifications of protection components are determined by the loads that are connected to the multiplexer A typical protection circuit for relay contacts is illustrated below O O ce RELAY X VARISIOR CONTACT l O RC NETWORK 272 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Protection Networks In designing RC protection networks the protection resistor Rp is selected as a compromise between two values The minimum value of R is determined by the maximum acceptable relay contact current Io The maximum allowable relay current Io is 2 amps ac rms or 2 amps dc Thus the minimum value for Ry is V Io where V is the peak value of the supply voltage Rp V lo V 2 Equation 1 The maximum value for R is usually made equal to the load resistance RI Therefore the limits on Rp can be stated as Vi lo lt R lt RI Equation 2 Note the actual value of Io in a circuit is determined by the equation To V RI Equation 3 Where V is the peak value of the source voltage and RI is the resistance of the load Equations 1 amp 2 use Io as the maximum allowable relay current to determine the minimum value of R The value for Io calculated in Equation 3 will be used to determine the value of the protection capacitor C In determine the value of the protection network capacitor Cp there are several things that need
184. hown below Additional information about the terminal block is given on page 285 44475A BREADBOARD MODULE Assembling the Breadboard Assemble the 44475A Breadboard using the following steps Load the components for the 8 bit Input and 8 bit Output ports Components were not supplied but are listed in the table below You can obtain these components from any supplier The figure on page 252 shows where these components are to be mounted on the Breadboard Quantity Component Description 1 SN 74LS138 3 to 8 line decoder 1 SN 74LS157 Quad 2 to 1 line data selector multiplexer noninverted data outputs 1 SN 74LS244 Octal Butters line drivers line receivers noninverted 3 state outputs 1 SN 74LS374 Octal D Type Flip Flops 3 state outputs 1 0 01 uF Capacitor 10 volts 1 1 uF Capacitor 10 volts 254 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44475A Breadboard Module 2 Install your custom circuitry Component height restrictions and how far the component leads extend through the circuit board are limited by the top and bottom shields These shields provide RF shielding as well as structural strength and must never be eliminated The maximum component height allowed is 12 7 mm 0 50 in However if the height of any component exceeds 10 mm the conductive surface of the component must be insulated On the circuit side of the Breadboard the lead lengths are limited to 3 2 mm 0 125 in f
185. hts up and the first level menu is shown CARD PAIR 1 Turn the knob to select SERIAL NO SERIAL NO 2 Press Enter The Agilent 3499A B C serial number is displayed MY12345678 3 Press Enter again to return to the first level of the Menu menu SERIAL NO 4 Press Menu again to exit the Menu menu the CONFIG annunciator turns off 53 Note Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation Local Remote Control Local Remote Control The instrument operates in two data entry modes local and remote In local mode all keys on the front panel are fully functional In remote mode some front panel keys are locked exception are Local Mon View Enter the arrow keys and the knob The instrument will enter the remote state upon receipt of any command over the remote interface The RMT annunciator lights You can regain control of the front panel keys when the instrument is in remote by pressing the Shift Local key The RMT annunciator turns off and the instrument return to local mode If the front panel keys are locked through either the SYSTem RWLock command on the RS 282 interface or a LOCAL LOCKOUT command on the GPIB interface the local key will not function You can restore the front panel operation by cycling power the instrument or by sending a SYSTem LOCal command on the RS 232 interface or a LOCAL command on the GPIB interface 54 System Overview Syst
186. ial cables with the characteristic impedance of the module used 50 Q or 75 Q Keep cables as short as possible especially in high frequency circuits or pulse circuits where a rise fall time of lt 50 nS is critical Long cables can add considerable delay time which can cause timing problems All test equipment such as counters spectrum analyzers oscilloscopes etc must be terminated in the characteristic impedance to minimize reflection loss 271 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Protection Networks Protection Networks This information applies specifically to the N2267A page 206 and 44471A page 236 multiplexer modules These multiplexers have provisions built in to allow you to add custom protection networks This information is general and may be used to help you design other relay protection circuits Protection networks are especially needed if the loads being switched are inductive loads such as incandescent lamps or electric motors The resistance of these loads is very low when the power is first applied for example the transient inrush current when switching on a lamp could be 15 times the steady state value When switching off inductive loads the counter EMF of the coil can generate high voltage across the relay contacts and may damage the contacts Current limitation circuitry should be used to prevent relay contacts from being damaged Space to mount a protection network is designed on the PC board to avoid t
187. ied with the module Included with the terminal block is a numbered label you can apply for slot identification The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external wiring to the 44477A The screw terminal is shown below Additional information about the terminal block is given on page 285 44477A FORM C RELAY 250V MAX 266 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules The Agilent 44478A and 44478B consist of two independent 4 to 1 multiplexers group 00 and group 01 that provide bidirectional switching The module s latching relays are configured in a tree structure to provide high isolation and low VSWR voltage standing wave ratio Each channel can switch up to 42V dc ac peak at frequencies up to 1 8 GHz The 44478A is intended for 50 Q impedance applications The 44478B is intended for 75 Q impedance applications User connections for the channels are through BNC connectors on the rear panel Each channel has an SMB connector on the main PC board used to connect resistive terminations and terminate unused channels The 3499A B C identifies this module as a 44472A on the front panel display Changing the state of channels other than channels 00 through 03 or 10 through 18 does not generate an error but has no effect Specifications for the 44478A B are given on page 347 267 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44478A B
188. ilt in digital I O Port 090 control module and the data from the last operation The lower display indicates that data last written to the bit channel 091 is 0 ROW 0 1 3 00 H255 L254 For a multifunction module the first function on the module is displayed then the next This display is an example of a multifunction module with matrix and DIO functions in slot 5 30 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Use a Digital I O Port To Use a Digital I O Port You can work with a digital I O module as a port all eight bits or as individual bits Reading a Digital I O Port You can read data from the built in 4 bit digital I O port or any one of the 8 bit ports on a digital I O or multifunction module with a DIO function You can read the entire port all bits when you select the slot for example the built in port is channel 090 Alternately you can read an individual bit by selecting the channel for example the first bit in the built in port is channel 091 Perform the following procedure to read from a port 1 Select a digital I O port Use the knob to select the slot and channel number The channel number is in the form of snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number 2 Read the data read from the selected port For example the display below shows the data read from port 401 DIN 255 401 Decimal format default DIN 11111111 401 Binar
189. imum Current Per Channel 5 A dc or ac rms Maximum Power Per Channel 150 W dc 1250 VA ac Thermal Offset Per Channel lt 3uV Initial Closed Channel lt 0 1 Q Resistance Belay Like Mechanical 5 x 10 at 180 cycles minute y e Electrical 105 at rated load Time to Close One Channel 16 mS E DC ISOLATION with terminal block Open Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 oa Channel Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 0 with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 o with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE without terminal block Capacitance Open Channel Channel Channel lt 10 pF with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 20 pF 100 kHz lt 0 10 dB Insertion Loss meine 1 MHz lt 0 20 dB with 502 termination 10 MHz lt 0 50 dB Crosstalk Pees ne aa at 1 MHz lt 50 dB with 509 termination 10 MHz lt 30 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 312 Chapter 9 Specifications N2265A Multifunction Module N2265A Multifunction Module 4X 4 Matrix Function E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 4x4 Maximum Voltage Terminal Terminal or Terminal Chassis 200 V dc or ac rms Maximum Guicene Per Channel 1 A dc or a
190. in the 20W power limit set for convection cooling no more than three 8 N2266A 40 Channel MUX Modules should be installed in an Agilent 3499A mainframe the remaining two slots must remain empty Other module combinations are acceptable for example two N2266A MUX modules plus any combination of other Agilent modules is permissible This limitation does not apply to the 3499B or 3499C mainframes 62 Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview Model Mainframe Relay ak Number Module Name Slots Type Description Required N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 1 Latching Consists of two independent 1 4 to 1 MUX to 4 MUX switches which can Module switch up to 30VDC or peak AC from DC to 3 0 GHz N2270A 10 Channel High 2 Non 10 channel 2 wire High Voltage Voltage MUX latching MUX module with maximum Module switching voltage 1000Vpk maximum switching power 10W N2272A 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 1 Latching 1 GHz RF 1 to 9 MUX module MUX Module which can be used in RF testing and measuring N2276A B_ Dual 1 to 6 4 3 Non 3 slot width Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX latching Microwave MUX Attenuator Attenuator Module module with optional Microwave switch blocks and programmable attenuator blocks 44470A D 10 20 Channel 1 Latching The 10 20 DPST Double pole MUX Module Single throw relays switch both HI and LO inputs up to 250V 2A with low differential offsets for accurate measurements 44472A Dual 4 Channel 1 Lat
191. in the error queue if any 4 Press Enter to return to the first level of the View menu the ERROR annunciator turns off 5 Press View again to exit the View menu operation the VIEW annunciator turns off All errors are cleared and the ERROR annunciator turns off once the error queue is viewed See the Error Messages chapter on page 165 for a complete list of error messages 37 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation Scanning Operation Scanning Operation The instrument allows you to combine an external measurement device such as a Digital Multimeter DMM with multiplexer channels to create a scan During a scan the instrument closes the configured multiplexer channels one at a time to allow a measurement to be made on that channel Before initiating a scan a scan list must be set up You can also specify an arm source a trigger source and the number of sweeps a sweep is one pass through the scan list to control the scan process All these can be done from the S List menu The procedure in this chapter describes a simple scan from the front panel For more information about scanning and using the parameters to control a scan see page 85 To Create a Scan List 1 Press the S List key to enter the scan list menu The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the first level of the menu is displayed ADD TO SCAN 101 2 Press Enter to begin the channel selection SELECT 101 3 Turn the knob to s
192. ing device that the 3499A B C has latched read the data 101 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Full Handshake Mode 5 Handshake Mode 5 provides a complete two wire handshake with a data direction line During write operations the PCTL line indicates that output data is valid during read operations it indicates that the digital T O module i e N2263A is ready for data The PFLG line is used by the peripheral device to indicate ready for data during write operations or data valid for read operations For this discussion write operations mean the plug in digital I O module is controlling the data lines Read operations mean external devices control the data lines and the digital I O module reads the data and controls the PCTL RD line t1 Time from I O line low to check for PFLG low DATA LINES 7 77 Z DATA VALID 1 ms minimum t2 Time from PFLG low to data valid 40 us minimum Write Operation VO DIRECTION t3 Time from data valid PCTL LINE E to PCTL low ah 30 us minimum PFLG LINE t4 Time from PCTL low to check for PFLG high 40 us minimum tt t2 t4 5 t5 Time from PFLG t3 t 1 ms 40 us 30 us 40us 35us i PCTL high 35 us minimum The complete handshaking sequence for Mode 5 is as follows The 3499A B C checks to see if the receiving device has set the PFLG line low this indicates the receiving device is ready to acce
193. ircuit board LOW SERIES i PROTECTION NETWORK o o a a Ce 7 C 4g o eMMo eo o oom care ai ear 5 amot o ee eog o o AMN Ber O LEHN O GIGH O TT h ezina tep EZENN 9 beeur HIGH SERIES SHUNT Protection Networks An RC protection network and a varistor can be installed in each relay path More detailed information about protection circuits is given on page 272 VARISTOR S O aiia RELAY NU TERMINAL 9S NETWORK 237 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module 44471A Wiring Information Use the Agilent 44481A Terminal Block to make connections to the 44471A One 44481A is supplied with the module The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external wiring to the 44471A The screw terminal is shown below Additional information about the terminal block is given on page 285 Channels gt 44471A GENERAL PURPOSE RELAY 250V MAX 238 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module 44471D 20 Channel GP Relay Module The Agilent 44471D GP Relay module provides 20 independent Single Pole Single Throw SPST Form A latching relays Typically used as an actuator assembly its low thermal characteristics make it ideal for independent non multiplexed signal switching The individual relays on this module are rated for a maximum open circuit voltage of 25
194. is plugged into is energized 3 Verify that the 3499A B C is turned on If the 83499A B C DOES NOT turn on after you perform the above procedure contact your nearest Agilent Service Center see page 8 16 WARNING Caution Caution Chapter 1 Quick Start To Install a Module in the 3499A B C To Install a Module in the 3499A B C The plug in modules you ordered were not installed in the mainframe The figure on page 18 shows how to install a plug in module into the 3499B mainframe Other mainframes use similar procedures Disconnect the power cord from the rear panel of the mainframe prior to installing or removing any modules Use anti static procedures when configuring installing or removing any plug in modules To prevent contamination to the modules that could degrade performance handle the modules by the side edges or shields only Do not touch the board surfaces or components Each plug in module may have terminal block s and or the cables for wiring to external circuits These terminations are also shipped separately For more details about terminal blocks cables and connections see Terminals and Connections Information on page 275 In order to stay within the 20W power limit set for convection cooling no more than three 3 N2266A 40 Channel MUX Modules should be installed in an Agilent 3499A mainframe the remaining two slots must remain empty Other module combinations are acceptable for exa
195. itch Commands Switch Commands These ROUTe commands are intended for use with all switching plug in modules You cannot use these commands to change the state of bits ina digital I O module ROUTe CLOSe lt channel list gt CLOSe lt channel list gt This command closes the switching channels specified in the channel_list The channel_list has the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number For all mainframes slot 0 refers to the 3499A B C control board Valid slot numbers are 3499A slots 0 through 5 3499B slots 0 through 2 3499C slots 0 through 9 The channel number nn is plug in module dependent Channel numbers for plug in modules are listed on page 70 To close a single channel use CLOS snn multiple channels use CLOS snn snn sequential channels use CLOS snn snn groups of sequential channels use CLOS snn snn snn snn or any combination of the above Channels in a channel_list may not close simultaneously The order in which the channels close when operated by a single command is not guaranteed Use sequential CLOSe commands if needed The CLOS query returns a 1 for a closed channel and a 0 for an open channel If you specify a list of channels the query returns a comma separated list of 0 s and 1 s in the same order as the channel_list The returned values indicate the programmed state of the relay This query does not physically monitor
196. k Information Microsoft and Windows are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by that organiza tion s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other Interna tional Standards Organization members Warranty The material contained in this document is provided as is and is subject to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent disclaims all warranties either express or implied with regard to this manual and any information contained herein including but not limited to the implied warranties of mer chantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing use or performance of this document or any information contained herein Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms the wa
197. l hang the bus until the self test completes SYSTem CPON lt slot ALL gt This command resets a specific module or all modules in the mainframe This command will open all switching channels on a module or set all digital I O ports to input ports This command has no affect on card pairing or scan configurations You can use this command to return a specific module to the power on state Unlike the RST command this command will not reset the mainframe changing scan lists scan configurations digital I O configurations or card pairing 157 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference System Level Control Commands DIAGnostic DISPlay INFOrmation lt message gt DISPlay STATe lt 0 1 OFF ON gt DISPlay STATe These commands control the front panel display The DIAGnostic DISPlay INFOrmation command is used to write messages to the display The message parameter is a string that can contain up to 13 characters You can enter the string in lower case characters but the display only shows upper case characters In addition each character except the 13th can be trailed by any one of four special characters These trailer special character are not counted as one of the thirteen characters Valid characters include Type Supported Characters Numeric 0 9 Alphabetic A Z Symbolic space 3 The DIAGnostic DISPlay STATe command turns the front panel display on or off The AD
198. lay INFOrmation lt message gt Display message on front panel See page 158 DISPlay STATe lt 0 1 OFF ON gt Disable Enable display See page 158 DISPlay STATe Query state of display See page 158 MONitor lt slot gt lt channel gt lt port gt 1 Monitor a slot or a channel port or disable a monitor See page 159 MONitor Query which slot or channel is monitored See page 159 RELay CYCLes lt channel lists Query relay cycle of the specified channels See page 155 RELay CYCLes MAX lt slot gt Query maximum cycles of channel relays See page 155 RELay CYCLes CLEar lt channel list gt Clear channel relay cycle See page 155 SPEEK lt slot gt lt register gt Read a 8 bit data from the lt register gt specified See page 131 SPOKE lt slots lt register gt lt data gt Write a 8 bit data to the lt register gt specified See page 131 INITiate Start a scanning cycle See page 138 ROUTe CHANnel DELay lt seconds gt lt channel_list gt ALL Set channel to channel interval See page 136 CHANnel DELay lt channel lists Query channel to channel interval See page 136 CLOSe lt channel_list gt Close one or multiple channels See page 127 2 e 3 D Q ep 3 D lt CLOSe lt channel_list gt Queries relay closed state See page 127 CLOSe STATe Query all closed relays See page 128 CPAir lt slot1 gt lt slot2 gt 1 Pair two
199. le b The Low L terminals of the 40 2 wire channels form the first 40 1 wire channels Channels 00 39 and the High H terminals of the 40 2 wire channels form the second 40 1 wire channels Channels 40 79 c The first channels CHOO amp CH20 of either banks BANK 0 and BANK 1 form Channel 00 the second channels CHO1 amp CH21 of either banks form Channel 01 and so on d A channel number on a matrix module is formed in Slot Row Column format i e channel address s23 means row 2 column 3 in Slot s 70 Chapter 3 System Overview Channel and Slot Addressing Plug in Module Channel Addressing snn s Slot Number nn Channel Number N2263A 32 Bit Digital O Module Individual Bits s00 s01 s02 s30 s31 8 Bit Ports s00 s01 s02 s03 16 Bit Ports s00 s02 32 Bit Port s00 N2264A 12 Channel GP Relay 3 Channel High current GP Relays 16 Bit Digital I O Module 12 GP Relays s00 s01 s02 510 s11 3 High current GP Relays s20 s21 s22 16 Bit Digital I O Individual Bits s30 31 s32 s44 s45 8 Bit Ports s30 s31 16 Bit Port s30 N2265A 4x4 Matrix 16 Bit Digital I O Module 4x4 Matrix Row 0 1 2 3 Column 0 1 2 3 s00 s01 s02 s03 10 s11 12 13 s20 s21 S22 S23 s30 s31 s32 s33 16 Bit Digital 1 0 Individual Bits s40 s47 s42 s54 s55 8 Bit Ports s40 s41 16 Bit Port s40 N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module 1 Wire Mode
200. le inputs and outputs make it well suited for monitoring and controlling devices compactly and cost effectively Typically the digital outputs are used to provide drive for relatively high current devices such as solenoids relays and small motors The digital inputs are used to monitor devices such as micro switches A simplified schematic of a single digital input and output line is shown below e OPEN COLLECTOR CURRENT SINK VMOS FET 5V y 9 ONE I O LINE e pl e Q DRIVER OUTPUT pe INPUT SENSE V REFERENCE VOLTAGE A Simple Digital I O Circuit The table below lists the available digital I O modules Model Mainframe Number Module Name Slots Descriptions Required N2263A 32 Bit Digital I O 1 The module offers 32 bidirectional I O lines and Module three handshake lines for sensing and control of external devices up to 42 V 600 mA All lines are TTL compatible 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O 1 The module offers 16 bidirectional I O lines and Module four handshake lines for sensing and control of external devices up to 30 V 125 mA All lines are TTL compatible 67 Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview Multifunction Modules A multifunction module combines two or more functions such as MUX GP Matrix Digital I O or DAC onto a single module making it possible to implement a complicated switching application with fewer modules Ther
201. le or multifunction module From the remote interface you can read data from the individual bit channels and 8 16 or 32 bit ports on a digital I O module or multifunction module as well as from the built in digital I O bits port numbered 090 through 094 Instrument reset will set all digital I O ports in the instrument as input ports Pressing Card Reset or issuing a SYST CPON command will set all ports on the specified module as input ports ports on other modules are not affected Front Panel Operation Select an 8 bit digital I O port press Read to read the data from the port The data can be displayed as either decimal or binary see page 34 Remote Interface Operation Use the following command to read an individual bit bit 6 on a module in slot 4 A 0 bit cleared or a 1 bit set will be returned SENSe DIGital DATA BIT 406 Read the bit channel 406 The following commands read values on 8 16 and 32 bit ports SENSe DIGital DATA BYTE VALue 400 Read the 8 bit Port 400 SENSe DIGital DATA WORD VALue 400 Read the 16 bit Port 400 SENSe DIGital DATA LWORD VALue 400 Read the 32 bit Port 400 The range of possible returned values is shown Parameter Decimal Range Hex range BYTE 0 to 255 00 to FF WORD 32768 to 32767 8000 to 7FFF LWORD 231 to 23 1 80000000 to 7FFFFFFF WORD values greater then 32767 and LWORD values greater then
202. lent 44474A external increment amp channel closed display off 337 Chapter 9 Specifications 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Center Center Center lt 0 002 pF Capacitance Common P Center Low lt 70 pF Low Chassis lt 0 20 uF Rise Time lt 0 7 ns Signal Delay lt 2 5 ns channel match lt 90 ps 3 30 MHz lt 0 50 dB RME E IO ae lt 0 75 dB 300 MHz lt 1 25 dB Crosstalk Within a Group 30 MHz lt 100 dB Channel Channel or 100 MHz lt 85 dB Channel Common 300 MHz lt 65 dB with 50Q termination Crosstalk Group to Group SOMA lt 85 dB with 50Q termination 109 MZ lt 85 dB 300 MHz lt 50 dB VSWR FOMM lt 1 06 with 50 Q termination OOM lt 1 12 300 MHz lt 1 43 a When all channels in a group are opened the last channel opened or channel 00 or 13 following a group RESET has channel common isolation of gt 80 dB 30 MHz gt 60 dB 100 MHz and gt 40 dB 300 MHz 338 Chapter 9 Specifications 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 16 Maximum Voltage Terminal Terminal or Terminal Chassis 250 V dc or ac rms Maximum Curent Per Channel 2 A dc or ac rms 5 Per Module 8 A dc or ac rms Maximu Power Per Channel 60 W dc 500 VA ac i Per Module 240 W dc 2000 VA ac Maximu
203. lies to all input and output operations on the same port When the instrument is turned on or reset the handshake mode is set to Mode 1 and the polarities of all configured lines are positive More information about handshake modes is given starting on page 98 95 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Front Panel Operation Select a digital I O module and press Mode CONFIG DIO is shown in the display Press Enter to show the second level menu and begin the configuration Note Be sure to select the module not a port or bit The options on this menu are only available when the module is selected N2263A 4 Select a DIO module v CONFIG DIO 4 Press Mode Vv MODE 1 4 Select flow control mode Press Enter Vv CONT POL POS 4 Select the control line polarity Press Enter v FLAG POL POS 4 Select the flag line polarity Press Enter v VO POL POS 4 Select the I O direction line polarity Press Enter Press Mode again to exit the menu Configure a port Select a digital I O port then press Mode the CONFIG annunciator lights up When DATA POLARITY appears in the display press Enter to set data line polarity and or use the knob to select DISP FORMAT and press Enter to set data display format for the port DIN 401 Or DIN 401 DATA POLARITY 401 DISP FORMAT 401 NEG POLARITY 401 BINARY 401 9
204. list When a scan starts the first channel in a scan list is closed The channel is then opened and the next channel in the list is closed This process repeats for all channels in the scan list You can sweep through a scan list more than once You can also synchronize scanned channel closures with external measurement devices Rules for Scanning A scan list must be specified before initiating a scan One or more switching channels digital I O bit channels and or previously stored channel setups can be included in a scan list The order of the channels in the scan list determines the order of the channels to be scanned If any plug in module is installed or removed while the instrument is operating the instrument will automatically perform a reset and the current scan list is cleared If a scan list contains a non existing channel the scan cannot be performed and an error will occur If a scan list contains a channel on a digital I O module that is not configured to handshake mode 1 or mode 2 see page 98 the scan cannot be performed and an error will occur If a mismatch between a stored channel setup in the scan list and the current hardware configuration is found a scan cannot be performed and an error will occur When a stored setup is included in the scan list the stored setup is recalled and the next channel in the scan list is switched When a scan is aborted the channel last scanned before the interruption will r
205. ltRM n exit 1 Open a session to the 3499A B C status viOpen drm INST_ADDR VI_NULL VI_NULL amp vi if status lt VI_SUCCESS printf VISA ERROR viOpen Address s n INST_ ADDR viClose drm exit 1 291 Cha pter 8 Application Programs Visual C Example Program if USING RS232 Set RS 232 parameters according to 3499A B C settings BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY NONE 8 BITS FLOW FLOW NONE viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_ASRL BAUD 9600 viSetAttribute vi VI ATTR ASRL DATA BITS 8 viSetAttribute vi VI ATTR ASRL FLOW CNTRL VI_ASRL_ FLOW NONE viSetAttribute vi VI_ATTR_ASRL PARITY VI_ASRL PAR NONE endif Set 3499A B C to SCPI mode viPrintf vi SYSMODE SCPI n Sleep 4000 Wait 4 seconds Reset the instrument to a known state viPrintf vi RST n Sleep 4000 Close channels 100 through 103 viPrintf vi CLOSE 100 103 n Open channels 100 through 103 viPrintf vi OPEN 100 103 n Scanning setup executing the following commands to make the instrument to scan sweep channels 100 through 103 two times The channels are scanned continuously and the second scan sweep starts 1 second after the start of the first scan sweep viPrintf vi SCAN 100 103 n Create a scan list viPrintf vi ARM SOURCE TIMER n Set arm source
206. ly configured a scan list can then be executed and measured without external computer control Port and bit numbering is show in the table below Note that the ports are numbered differently if you are using the 3488 System mode System Mode 16 Bit Port 8 Bit Port Bit PORT 00 Bits 0 7 LO BYTE SCPI mode PORT 00 PORT 01 Bits 0 7 HI BYTE PORT 00 Bits 0 7 LO BYTE 3488A Mode PORT 02 PORT 01 Bits 0 7 HI BYTE Specifications for the 44474A are given on page 341 248 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module 44474A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below Note that all 16 I O lines and 4 control lines share a common Lo connection The 16 bits I O lines are numbered as bits 0 through 15 when the module is addressed individually The bits 0 7 refer to the bits 0 7 of the LO BYTE and the bits 8 15 refer to the bits 0 7 of the HI BYTE OPEN COLLECTOR ONE I O LINE 1 CURRENT SINK i io VMOS FET X 5V 1 V i 1 i 10K i 0 25A TERMINAL 4 pe oo CONNECTION gt DRIVER OUTPUT l BLOCK 47V I 1 INPUT SENSE lt j DECERENCE VOLTAGE a eee a ene a l 5V i k CHAN CLOSED x i TERMINAL i i PCTL RD gt i CONNECTION i IO WR i 4 V 45V 45V l l 1k A 47 i TERMINAL i PFLG EXT INC S CONNECTION a Vv 249 Chapter 7 Plug in Mod
207. ly designed for broadband signal switching up to 300 MHz This module is the ideal choice for wide dynamic range measurements with spectrum and distortion analyzers Connections to the module are made through 10 BNC coaxial connectors mounted directly on the 44472A Characteristic impedance is 50 Q The 44472A is not recommended for use with instruments that require high DC isolation from earth ground such as a DMM Specifications for the 44472A are given on page 337 242 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module 44472A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The 44472A VHF Switch module contains of two groups GROUP 0 amp GROUP 1 of 4 to 1 coaxial MUXs The two groups are isolated from each other and also from the mainframe chassis ground to eliminate ground loops Furthermore the shield or low of each channel is NOT switched the shields of the four channels in each group are in common A tree relay scheme is used to provide higher isolation between channels and from open channels to common Channels are numbered as 00 through 08 for group 0 and 10 through 13 for group 1 CHANNEL 3 COMMON 0 CHANNEL 4 GROUP 0 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL Q NOTE GROUNDS ARE NOT COMMC BETWEEN GROUP 0 AND GROUP 1 COMMON 1 CHANNEL 1 2 GROUP 1 CHANNEL 1 1 CHANNEL 90 243 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44472A Dual 4 Channel VHF Switch Module 44472A Wiring I
208. m The following plug in module use parallel switching N2260A N2261A N2264A N2265A and N2266A For example the 40 2 wire relays on the N2260A can be separated into four banks Bank 1 CH00 09 through Bank 4 CH380 39 The switches up to 10 in the same bank can be closed simultaneously parallel switching Since a relay is controlled by the signal applied to it s coil relay coils can be arranged in arrays to simplify the driver circuits Coils aligned in the same row share a common row control signal and coils aligned in the same column share a common column control signal The figure below shows an array of coils with 4 rows and 10 columns This is different from the wiring of the relay terminal from users point of view Relays can be connected and configured as MUX GP or MATRIX while their driver circuits are similar mo oe aiiiiii in Relay Coil paia dolla r3 Fado a atalii Col7 Col8 Col9 Cold Col1 Col2 Col3 Col4 Cold Col6 The 3499A B C C C supports parallel operation of latching relays Any relay in the same row can be opened or closed at the same time Basically the relays are switched row by row or bank by bank 84 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning Scanning The Agilent 3499A B C can scan switching channels digital I O bit channels and stored channel setups in a scan
209. m Overvoltage 1400 Vpk Transients Thermal Offset lt 3 uV differential Initial Closed Channel lt 19 Resistance Relay Life Dry Load of lt 300 mA amp lt 10 V 108 y ene Maximum Rated Load 105 Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION Open Channel Channel Channel lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 95 RH gt 10 Q HI LO lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 95 RH gt 1080 Channel Chassis lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q lt 40 C 95 RH gt 5x108 Q with 1 channel closed a Using the 44474A external increment amp channel closed display off 339 Chapter 9 Specifications 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Capacitance Open Channel Channel Channel lt 5 pF HI LO lt 40 pF with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 70 pF 100 kHz lt 0 30 dB Insertion Loss with 502 termination TMH e 10 MHz lt 0 90 dB 100 kHz lt 76 dB Crosstalk i vit 1 MHz lt 56 dB with 509 termination 10 MHz lt 36 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 340 Chapter 9 Specifications 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module
210. mand specifies the system mode to use Changing the mode will reset the 3499A B C see page 74 but the RS232 or GPIB settings will not be affected If you change modes with this command you must allow a minimum 5 second interval before performing other operations The SYSMODE query returns a string containing either SCPI or HP3488A For information about the 3488 programming mode please visit www agilent com 159 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference RS 232 Commands RS 232 Commands These commands only apply to operations with the RS 232 interface SYSTem LOCal REMote RWLock The SYSTem LOCal command sets the local mode for RS 232 operation All keys on the front panel are fully functional in this mode The SYSTem REMote command sets the instrument to the remote mode for RS 232 operation All keys on the front panel except Local View Mon Enter the knob and the two arrow keys are disabled When the 3499A B C has been addressed to listen the RMT and ADRS annunciators turn on to indicate the instrument is in the Remote mode The ERROR annunciator turns on whenever an error occurs The SYSTem RWLock command sets the instrument to the remote mode of operation All keys on the front panel are disabled in this mode This command is the same as the SYSTem REMote command except that all keys on the front panel are disabled 160 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference About the SCPI Lang
211. matched to 50 ps a Z Z 50 Q applies for the 44478A and Z Zs 75 Q applies for the 44478B b The CrossTalk specifications assume 50 Q termination for the 44478A and 75 Q termination for the 44478B If all channels unterminated derate specification by 6 dB 348 Index If you have questions realated to the operation of the Agilent 3499A B C or plug in modules call 1 800 453 4844 in the United States or contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales Office CLS 108 149 166 ESE 151 ESE 151 ESR 151 TDN 59 153 OPC 156 OPC 156 RCL 107 147 RST 74 156 SAV 107 147 SRE 152 SRE 152 STB 152 TRG 138 TST 157 TST command 109 1 wire mode 82 178 2 wire mode 178 3488 Mode Defaults 75 3488A mode selection 112 3499A Features 2 rack mount 23 rear panel 6 3499B Features 2 rack mount 24 rear panel 6 3499C Features 2 rack mount 26 rear panel 7 44470A module channel numbering 72 description 230 descriptoin 63 mounting attenuators 231 relay type 63 simplified schematic 230 specifications 329 wiring 232 44470D module channel numbering 72 connector pinout 235 description 63 233 pinout 235 relay type 63 simplified schematic 233 wiring 234 44471A module channel numbering 72 descriptioin 64 description 236 mounting attenuators 237 relay type 64 simplified schematic 236 specifications 333 wiring 238 44471D module channel numbering 72 description
212. matic is shown below The N2270A consists of 10 2 wire channels and a common bus The 10 channels of the N2270A are numbered from 00 through 09 CHO through CH9 4 O E ono i 4 CHS i D oL 4 OH COM 212 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2270A 10 Channel High Voltage MUX Module N2270A Wiring Information The 28 pin connector on the rear panel is an AMP 1800V Plug Connector 205689 2 O J Agilent N2270A CH HI d High Voltage MUX 1000Vdc Vrms LoO WARNING An Agilent N2320A terminal block can be used to wire external high voltage signals to the N2270A Included in the N2320A are an AMP 1800V Receptacle Connector 205690 2 and an AMP AWG24 20 Socket 66399 4 The connector has a metal strain relief and you must make sure to use additional insulation around the wires to prevent the wire insulation being cut broken or otherwise damaged at the strain relief clamp Refer to page 283 for more information about the N2320A Voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 Vpk or 60 Vdc present an electric shock hazard Disconnect source voltages before removing or connecting the source to module I O connector or wiring the connector All field wiring must be rated for the highest voltage applied to any channel N2270A Pinout The pinout assignments are shown below Column Column Column Column Column Column Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
213. minals and Connections Information Insert wired Socket into the Receptacle Replace the metal shield and tighten relevant screws Plastic isolation tube The strain relief clamp can be used to tighten wires with additional insulation around them Additional insulation should be used around the wires to prevent possible damage caused by the strain relief clamp 284 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information 4448X Screw Terminal Connector Blocks Screw terminal connectors are available for the 44470A 44471A 44473A 44474A 44475A and 44477A plug in modules One of these terminals is shipped with each plug in module Refer to the specific plug in module wiring information for details about the connector and pin out assignments The figures below shows the basic steps to wire and assemble this type of terminal Germ JIA WIRE SIZE 18 TO 26 GAUGE SOLID OR STRANDED STEP 1 STEP 2 285 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information STEP 3 STRAIN RELIEF ISING STRAIN RELIEF PLATE STRA oPRB IEF CORRECT INCORRECT 44477 F 8C 286 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information 4448x Screw Terminal Blocks Screw terminal blocks are available for the 44470D and 44471D plug in modules One of these terminals is shipped with each plug in module Refer to the specific
214. modules installed in slots 2 and 5 1 Press the Menu key The CONFIG annunciator lights up and CARD PAIR is displayed 2 Press Enter When FIRST SLOT x is displayed turn the knob to select the first slot to be paired e Slot 2 FIRST SLOT 2 3 Press Enter When SECOND SLOT x is displayed turn the knob to select the second slot to be paired 1 e Slot 5 SECOND SLOT 5 4 Press Enter to return to the first level of the Menu menu CARD PAIR 5 Press Menu again to exit the Menu menu The CONFIG annunciator turns off 41 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure for External Trigger To Configure for External Trigger You can use one of two modules for an external trigger The built in rear panel TRIG IN and TRIG OUT pair on the control module or the EI External Increment and the CC Channel Closed pair on a 44474A module Only one pair can be used at a time You can specify which pair to use and whether a trigger out pulse is sent out when a relay is closed during scanning operations Refer to Scanning on page 85 for more details 1 Press the Menu key The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the display shows the first level menu CARD PAIR 2 Turn the knob to show the second menu item CONF EXT TRIG CONF EXT TRIG 3 Press Enter The display shows the next level menu TRIG SLOT 0 42
215. mple two N2266A MUX modules plus any combination of other Agilent modules is permissible This limitation does not apply to the 3499B or 3499C mainframes Module Removal To remove a plug in module from the Agilent 3499A B C mainframe reverse the procedures shown on page 18 17 STEP 1 STEP 2 1 Hold the sides of the module component side 1 Face the mainframe rear panel toward you down by the metal shields 2 Select a slot in which the module is to be 2 Insert the module into the slot guides and slide installed the module toward the front of the instrument 3 Push firmly until the module snaps into place 4 Push both plastic levers inward to lock the module STEP 3 for modules with terminal blocks STEP 4 for modules with terminal blocks 1 Wire the screw terminal block module 1 Push firmly until the terminal block snaps into dependent refer to chapter 7 for details place 2 Attach the screw terminal block to the plug in 2 Secure the screw terminal block with the two module screws Torque lt 8 in lbs Module installation 18 Chapter 1 Quick Start Basic Operation Basic Operation An Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System can be easily operated from the front panel or programmed with SCPI commands over the remote interface The following sections are only intended to show the basic front panel operation For detailed front panel operation refer to the Front
216. n power is modules limits 4 0 ONLY if cycled 3488A Mode programming to control board supports all either SCPI revision is modules except Mode or 3488A upgraded to 2 0 N2272A Mode not both N2276A B or N2282A 4 0 2 0 Stored setups SCPI Mode Firmware NO are saved supports all Version 4 0 Instrument modules allows can be 3488A Mode programming in programmed supports all both SCPI to power up in modules except Mode and a set state N2272A 3488A Mode N2276A B or N2282A 1 Upgrading to firmware revision 4 0 requires the control module be upgraded to revision 2 0 Control module revision 1 0 does not support firmware revision 4 0 60 Note Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview Plug in Modules Overview The Agilent 3499A B C mainframes support multiple Plug in modules including all the existing 3488A modules 4447XX modules as well as several new ones N22XXX modules Based on their functions the modules can be divided into five classes Multiplexer MUX modules General Purpose Relay GP modules Matrix modules Digital I O DIO modules Multifunction modules Optical Modules Refer to the Plug in Modules chapter on page 173 for the details of the individual Plug in modules MUX Modules A MUX multiplexer module switches one signal to multiple DUTs devices under test or multiple signals to one device one at a time Example applica
217. n Modules N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module 1 Wire Mode In this mode either the High H or Low L terminal of a channel is switched to the single ended SE COM terminal The Low terminals form the first 40 1 wire channels 00 39 and the High terminals form the second 40 1 wire channels 40 79 Only one channel can be closed at a time in the 1 wire mode Only one channel can be closed at a time in the 1 wire mode 2 Wire Mode This is the default mode of the N2266A and provides 40 2 wire channels In this mode the Hi and Lo terminals of a channel are switched to Hi and Lo common terminals COMO and COM1 The channels are numbered 00 through 39 Dual 2 Wire Mode In this mode the N2266A is separated into two independent banks BANK 0 amp BANK 1 Each bank consists of 20 2 wire channels and a corresponding common bus COMO and COM1 The channels in BANK 0 are numbered 00 through 19 and the channels in BANK 1 are numbered 20 through 39 You must modify the PC board to use this mode of operation The modification is described in the next section 4 Wire Mode In this mode the two banks BANK 0 amp BANK 1 are paired to form a 20 channel 4 wire multiplexer The first channels of each bank CH00 amp CH20 form Channel 00 the second channels of the each bank CH01 amp CH21 form Channel 01 and so on An instrument power on or reset will set the N2266A to its default configuration as a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module When powered of
218. n list contains a channel on a digital I O module that does not work in Mode 1 or Mode 2 the scan cannot be performed and an error will occur see page 98 for more information about modes If a stored channel setup in the scan list does not match the current hardware configuration the scan cannot be performed and an error will occur Front Panel Operation Press Sean to begin the scan operation If you have set the arm source and trigger source to IMMediate the scan will begin when the key is pressed If you have configured other arm or trigger sources the scan will begin when the source criteria are met Stop a scan in progress by pressing Shift Scan The last channel closed in the scan list will remain closed You cannot pause and then continue a scan You must start the scan operation over Press Step to start and step through the channels in the scan list one channel at a time Remote Interface Operation Use the commands shown below to begin a scan or stop a scan in progress If you abort a scan in progress the last channel closed in the scan list will remain closed You cannot pause and then continue a scan You must start the scan operation over The INITiate command moves the instrument from the idle state to the arm layer The arm source and trigger source will control the actual beginning of the scan INITiate lInitiate the scan ABORt Stop the scan 92 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning Using Exte
219. n with other modules such as the 44470A 10 Channel MUX to provide a wide variety of switching combinations When wiring between multiple modules keep wire length as short as possible to minimize noise and signal degradation Specifications for the 44473A are given on page 339 245 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module 44473A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The 44473A consists of 16 2 wire relays nodes crosspoints organized in a 4 row by 4 column matrix Channels in this matrix module are numbered in the Row Column format For example channel 32 represents the crosspoint connection between row 3 and column 2 while the channel 23 represents the crosspoint connection between row 2 and column 3 and so on COLO COL1 COL2 COL3 HL HL HL HL O 00o o fo ROWO eke ROW1 oo rc 0G L ROW2 ROWS oo rc CHANNEL 32 ROW 3 COLUMN 2 246 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module 44473A Wiring Information Use the Agilent 44483A Terminal Block to make connections to the 44473A One 44483A is supplied with the module The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external wiring to the 44473A The screw terminal is shown below Additional information about the terminal block is given on page 285 Rows y y Columns COLUMN 0 1 2
220. nd will also stop a scan in progress but the scan configuration and scan list are lost When a scan is aborted the channel last scanned before the interruption will remain closed A scan cannot resume from where it is interrupted TRIGger IMMediate This command is used as a trigger source in the arm or trigger layer when the SOURce is set to HOLD TRG This IEEE 488 2 common command is used as a trigger source in the arm or trigger layer when the SOURce is set to BUS 138 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Digital O Commands Digital I O Commands You may use the built in digital I O bits or port one or more digital I O modules or a multifunction modules with a DIO function In the following context multifunction modules refer to those with a DIO function The built in digital I O control board consists of four bits which can be operated either independently as four bit channels numbered 091 through 094 or as one 4 bit port numbered 090 The plug in digital I O modules and multifunction modules usually consist of several 8 16 and or 32 bit ports These ports can be operated independently which means one port can be used for output operation while others can be used for input However all bits within a same 8 bit port are dependent If one bit of a port is used for input or output operation then all other bits of the same port can only be used for the same operation For a complete discussion of
221. nformation Regardless of the topology configuration you are using always use 50 Q shielded coaxial cables to maintain both characteristic impedance and isolation Keep cables as short as possible especially in high frequency circuits or pulse circuits where a rise fall time of less than 50 nsec is critical Long cables can add considerable delay time which may cause timing problems All test equipment counters spectrum analyzers oscilloscopes etc must be terminated with a 50 Q impedance to minimize reflection loss The rear panel is shown below Switch Group 0 Switch Group 1 ee a a 44472A VHF SWITCH 244 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module 44473A 4 x 4 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module The Agilent 44473A Matrix Switch provides a 4 x 4 matrix of 2 wire switches Each node crosspoint in the matrix contains a latching relay that connects a row to a column Both Hi H and Lo L lines are switched More than one switch can be closed at a time allowing any combination of rows and columns to be connected Matrix switching provides a convenient way to connect a group of test instruments to multiple test points on a device or to multiple devices This matrix switch offers highly flexible switching for testing devices over a frequency range of dc to 100 kHz Multiple 44473A modules may be connected together to form a larger matrices The 44473A can also be used in conjunctio
222. ng For each switch only one channel can be closed at a time Closing one channel will open the other channel in the same switch After power on or a reset the common channel of each 1 to 4 optical switch is connected to the third channel by default Specifications for the N2281A are given on page 327 N2281A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The Agilent N2281A consists of two independent 1 to 4 optical switches Channels are numbered as 00 01 02 03 for COMO and 10 11 12 13 for COM1 The third channel of each 1 to 4 optical switch is connected to the common channel by default a Cho0 a pot Chor m Ch02 nomally closed m Ch03 m Chi0 m Ch11 Chi 2 Nomally closed Ch13 ee gt Powered State 226 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2281A Dual 1 to 4 Optical Switch Module N2281A Wiring Information Use SC APC connectors to connect external optical signals to the N2281A module The rear panel is shown below ye Agilent N2281A DUAL 1X4 OPTICAL SWITCH COM 0 COM 1 O Oo O O O O O O O O O O w Oa o Bo Pn On Cr CO g 227 Note Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module N2282A 1 to 8 Optical Switch Module The Agilent N2282A Optical Switch contains a latching 1 to 8 optical switch Only one channel at a time may be closed
223. nnel_list can be a single channel use DEL snn multiple channels use DEL snn snn sequential channels use DEL snn snn groups of sequential channels use DEL snn snn snn snn or any combination of the above The ROUTe CHANnel DELay query returns the delay time of each channel included in the channel_list A comma delineated set of values is returned The values are in same order as in the channel_list and in the form of snn snn mm where snn is the channel number and mm is a stored channel setup 136 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Scanning Commands CONFigure EXTernal TRIGger SOURce lt slot gt EXTernal TRIGger SOURce EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut lt 0 1 OFF ON gt EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut These commands select and enable external triggers Two possible source are available the built in source available at the rear panel mini DIN connector or the EI CC lines in a 44474A DIO Module For additional information about external triggering see Using External Triggering on page 93 The slot parameter in the command sets the location of the external trigger lines The built in trigger lines are on slot 0 If a 44474A is installed slot can be set to the corresponding slot number After power on or a reset RST command the slot is set to 0 The CONFigure EXTernal TRIGger SOURce query returns a number indicating the external trigger source The CO
224. nt to a saved instrument state SYSTem STATe DELete lt mem gt ALL This command deletes a single instrument state or all stored states 147 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Status System Commands Status System Commands This section describes the structure of the SCPI status system for the Agilent 3499A B C and describes the commands used to work with the status system The status system records various conditions events and states of the instrument in three register groups The three groups are shown below Standard Event Register NOTE Message Available teem Standard Event Request Service Power On Operation Status Condition Register Command Error Event Register Execution Error EN Enable Register Device Dependent Error SRQ Sevice Request Query Error Set by OPC Related commands Operation Complete are OPC and WAI Output Buffer summery Waiting in Arm Layer Waiting in Trigger Layer SRQ ROUTING passed to the Operation status Register controller via N e Request Service STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation ENABIe unmask examples unmask Register decimal Summary bit weight Bit OR Operation Complete 8 OPR ESE 61 unmasks standard event register bits O 2 3 4 and 5 ESE 1 only unmasks bit 0 SRE 128 unmasks the OPR bit in the status byte register This is effective only if the STAT OPER ENAB lt unmask gt command is
225. o Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 318 Chapter 9 Specifications N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module N2268A 500 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels Dual 1 to 4 Chans Maximum Switching Voltage Any center shield to any other center shield chassis 30 V dc or peak AC A Pree _ Per Channel 0 5 A dc or peak AC Maximum Switching Current Per Module 1 A dc or peak AC x PEE S Per Channel 10 W Maximum Switching Power Per Module 20 W Characteristic Impedance 50 Q Mechanical 5 x 10 Relay Life 10mA 24VDC resist load 3x10 10W 2 5G 509 105 Thermal Offset Per Channel 3 uV Initial Closed Channel lt 1 Resistance Maximum Scan Rate 20 Chans sec E DC CHARACTERISTICS Open Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 1010 Q Channel Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 9 with 1 Channel closed HI LO lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 Q with 1 Channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 9 Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 101 o lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 a with 1 Channel closed 319 Chapter 9 Specifications N2268A 50Q 3 0 GHz Dual 1 to 4 MUX Module E AC CHARACTERISTICS Bandwidth 3dB 50 source 50 termination 3 5 GHz Insertion Loss Aa ss E with 50Q termination 3 GHz
226. o those with a DIO function The built in digital I O control board consists of four bits which can be operated either independently as four bit channels numbered 091 through 094 or as one 4 bit port numbered 090 The plug in digital I O modules and multifunction modules usually consist of several 8 16 and or 32 bit ports These ports can be operated independently which means one port can be used for output operation while others can be used for input However all bits within a same 8 bit port are dependent If one bit of a port is used for input or output operation then all other bits of the same port can only be used for the same operation For more information about a specific digital I O module refer to Plug in Modules starting on page 173 Digital I O Configuration Parameters such as flow control mode control line polarity PCTL flag line polarity PFLG and I O direction line polarity are all configured for the plug in digital I O modules and multifunction modules However these DO NOT apply to the built in 4 bit digital I O on the rear panel The data line polarity of any 8 bit port or the 4 bit built in port can be configured from the front panel However using the remote interface the data line polarity of any ports 8 16 or 32 bit can be configured Data display format of any 8 bit port binary or decimal default can only be specified from the front panel Once specified the format app
227. ocedure to read the revision from the front panel or page 153 for remote interface operation From the front panel Control Module Revision Firmware Revision Typical Display 1 0 1 0 REVISION 1 0 1 0 2 0 REVISION 2 0 1 0 3 0 REVISION 3 0 2 0 4 0 REV 4 0 2 0 From the remote interface in response to the IDN query one of two typical strings is returned Agilent Technologies 3499 cnxxxxxx 3 0 Agilent Technologies 3499 myxxxxxx 4 0 2 0 In these strings cnxxxxxx or myxxxxxx is the instrument serial number Note that the control module revision is not returned for revision 1 0 control modules The table on the next page lists the differences between firmware and control module revisions 59 Chapter 3 System Overview Firmware and Control Module Description Firmware Sento Plug in module Programming Finmware Version Module State Storage Support Modes Upgrade Version Needed 1 0 1 0 Stored setups Must upgrade Not Applicable YES are cleared if hardware and power is firmware cycled 2 0 1 0 Stored setups Supports all Firmware Upgrade to are cleared if modules except Version 2 0 Firmware power is N2272A allows Revision 3 0 cycled N2276A B programming in ONLY if using N2282A both SCPI N2272A Mode and N2276A B or 3488A Mode N2282A 3 0 1 0 Stored setups SCP Mode Firmware Upgrade to are cleared if supports all Version 3 0 firmware revisio
228. odes 3 4 or 5 the three control lines are valid for the port used Other ports on the same module can be used in modes 1 or 2 the three control lines do not apply to these ports This command cannot be used with the built in 4 bit digital I O port The SOURce DIGital MODe query returns an integer ranging from 1 to 5 140 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Digital O Commands SOURce DIGital CONTrol POLarity lt slot gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt CONTrol POLarity lt slot gt FLAG POLarity lt slot gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt FLAG POLarity lt slot gt 10 POLarity lt slot gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt I10 POLarity lt slot gt These commands set the polarity of the three handshake lines The CONTrol portion of the command works with the PCTL Peripheral control line The FLAG portion of the command works with the PFLG peripheral flag line The IO portion of the command works with the I O direction line The slot parameter is a decimal ranging from 1 to 5 These commands do not work with the built in 4 bit digital I O port 0 Following power on or a reset RST command the polarities are set to 0 or POSitive The query versions of these commands return one of two strings POS or NEG SOURce DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt POLarity lt port gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt POLarity lt port gt This command sets the data line polarity for the specified port The current state of the dat
229. odules N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module The Agilent N2260A is a configurable multiplexer MUX module It contains 40 2 wire latching relays for switching and two non latching tree relays for configuration The N2260A can be configured as an 80 channel 1 wire multiplexer a 40 channel 2 wire multiplexer default two independent 20 channel 2 wire multiplexers or a 20 channel 4 wire multiplexer These modes can be selected from the front panel or with a SCPI command see page 83 An instrument power on or reset will set the N2260A to its default configuration as a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module The N2260A can be operated in either SCPI mode or 3488A mode but configuration is only possible in the SCPI mode In 3488A mode the N2260A can only be used as a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module A parallel switching feature makes the N2260A well suited for high speed switching The 40 2 wire relays on the N2260A can be separated into four groups and up to 10 relays in the same group can be closed simultaneously parallel switching The groups are group 1 channel 00 through channel 09 group 2 channel 10 through channel 19 group 3 channel 20 through channel 29 and group 4 channel 30 through channel 39 Additional information about parallel switching is given on page 84 Specifications for the N2260A are given on page 303 176 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module
230. on or reset The ROUTe CPAir query returns a list of four numbers separated with commas indicating the four slots in which two pairs of modules are plugged If there is only one pair 0 0 will be returned for the last two numbers 0 0 0 0 is returned if no cards are paired 129 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Specific Plug in Module Commands For example using a 3499C mainframe if you send ROUT CPA 1 3 to pair the modules in slots 1 and 3 the ROUT CPA query will return 1 3 0 0 ROUTe FUNCtion lt slot gt lt 1 2 3 4 WIRE1 WIRE2 BIWIRE2 WIRE4 gt FUNCtion lt slot gt ROUTe FUNCtion is used to configure a N2260A see page 176 or N2266A see page 200 40 channel MUX module Four configurations are possible 80 channel 1 wire MUX 40 channel 2 wire MUX two 20 channel 2 wire MUXs 20 channel 4 wire MUX After an instrument power on or reset the module will return to the default 40 channel 2 wire MUX mode Changing function mode will open all the switching channels on a module 1 Wire Mode 1 WIRE1 configures the MUX as an 80 channel single ended 1 wire MUX module The valid channel numbers are s00 to s79 The Low L terminals form channels 00 through 39 the High H terminals form channels 40 through 79 Only one channel can be closed at a time when in 1 wire mode 2 Wire Mode 2 WIRE2 configures the MUX as a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module The valid channel numbers are s00 s39
231. owed A channel list was received but is not allowed for this command Example SYST CTYPE 100 Data out of range A numeric parameter value is outside the valid range for this command Example ARM COUNT 3 Too much data A character string was received but could not be executed because the string length was more than 13 characters This error can be generated by the DIAGnostic DISPlay command Illegal parameter value A discrete parameter was received which was not a valid choice for this command You may have used an invalid parameter choice Example TRIG SOURCE ALARM ALARM is not a valid choice System error A firmware defect has been found This is not a fatal error but you should contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Service Center see page 8 if this error is reported Queue overflow The error queue is full because more than 10 errors have occurred No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue The error queue is cleared by the CLS clear status command or when power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the queue Query INTERRUPTED A command was received which sends data to the output buffer but the output buffer contained data from a previous command the previous data is not overwritten The output buffer is cleared when power has been off or after a bus Device Clear 169 420 430 440 100 101 102 103 104 110 111 Chapter
232. page 281 The screw terminal block N2294A is shown below To use the other connection options you will need to use the pinout information given on page 195 CONNECT TO P601 Caution AS b f 13 4 5 rO c i P100 r y GND GND 1 J106 J105 et 1 ag a iS GND GND coal ema POTL GND O H HE H 5 12 PFLG 170 cH22 cH21 tcH204 a E 38 30 8 gt Soks dols 5 39 3j g s 5 5 z4 Oer cd call e k Ez Ft 42 amp amp 34 FOR MULTIFUNCTION oat 5 43 35 DIO GP a 44 36 om i E 1 45 3 O 12 pins 6 H and 6 L are provided for each channel of the 3 Channel High current GP Relay Make sure to use ALL 12 pins whenever the switched current exceeds 1 amp 194 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2264A Multifunction Module N2264A Pinout P601 is a 96 pin male DIN connector mounted on the N2264A The connector and pinout assignments are shown below 32 31 30 2928 27 262524 232221 20191817 1615 1413121110 9876 543 21 Cljeoeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeoe ee eee eeeeeeeeee C i Pereiisserrsrsss
233. pt data When PFLG is low the 3499A B C sets the data on the data bus and sets PCTL low The 3499A B C then waits for the receiving device to set PFLG high indicating that it has latched the data To complete the handshake the 3499A B C sets PCTL high 102 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Read Operation t1 Time from output DATA VALID disable to I O line DATA LINES XZ KI IZZZA high 100 us minimum t2 Time from T O line high to check for I O DIRECTION PFLG low 7 45 us minimum PCTL LINE t3 Time from PFLG low to check for PCTL low 50 us minimum t4 Time from PCTL low PFLG LINE to check PFLG high 40 us minim igh 40 us minimum t3 2 t4 t5 t5 Time from PFLG pope SO us 22 ne high to PCTL high and data latched 35 us minimum As with the Write operation the 3499A B C begins by testing PFLG for a low state indicating that the data is valid When PFLG is low the 3499A B C sets PCTL low and waits for PFLG to go high The 3499A B C will set PCTL high to indicate that it has completed the data read operation Data on the data bus must remain valid until after the 3499A B C sets PCTL high 103 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Digital Input Operation From the front panel you can read data from the built in digital I O bits port numbered 090 through 094 or any one of the 8 bit ports on a digital I O modu
234. put lines either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 330 Chapter 9 Specifications 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 20 Maximum Voltage Terminal Terminal or Terminal Chassis 250 V dc or ac rms Maximum Current Per Channel or Module 2 A dc or ac rms Maximum Power Per Channel or Module 60 W dc 125 VA ac Maximum Overvoltage Transients 1400 Vox Thermal Offset lt 3 pV differential or single ended Initial Closed Channel lt 10 Resistance Relay Lite Dry Load of lt 300 mA amp lt 10 V 108 See Maximum Rated Load 10 Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION Open Channel Channel lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q Channel lt 40 C 95 RH gt 5x 10 with 1 channel closed HI LO lt 40 C 60 RH gt 5x 10 with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 95 RH gt 10 99 Channel Chassis lt 40 C 60 RH gt 5x10 o lt 40 C 95 RH gt 10 99 with 1 channel closed a Using the 44474A external increment amp channel closed display off 331 Chapter 9 Specifications 44470D 20 Channel MUX Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Open Channel Channel Channel lt 7 pF Capacitance with 1 channel closed ioe lt 27 pF Channel Chassis lt 80 pF Insertion Loss 100 krz lt 0 20 dB
235. quired to store an instrument setup into an Agilent 3499A B C with Firmware REV 4 0 To avoid errors in when programming be sure to allow a 1 second interval between the store and recall operations To Recall an Instrument State You can recall a previously stored instrument setup Front Panel Operation To recall a stored setup press Recall select the memory location to be recalled and press Enter To cancel the recall operation press Recall again instead of Enter Remote Interface Operation RCL 1 Recall a previously stored setup from memory location 1 107 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Error Conditions Error Conditions When an error occurs the 3499A B C will beep and the ERROR annunciator on the front panel lights up This indicates one or more command syntax or hardware errors have been detected Up to 10 errors can be stored in the instrument error queue Errors are retrieved in a first in first out FIFO manner which means the first error returned is the first error that was stored If more than 10 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with 350 QUEUE OVERFLOW No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the instrument responds with NO ERROR The error queue will be cleared automatically once you read the queue change the system mode send the
236. r Common Each Resistive Termination 44478A 44478B With No Load At Maximum Rated Power 1 A dc or ac rms 24 W 24 VA or 44 dBm 0 25 W 0 25 VA or 24 dBm 50 2 75Q 5 x 10 operations 10 operations Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec E DC PERFORMANCE Thermal Offset Per Channel lt 6 pV lt 2 uV Typical Initial Closed Channel Resistance lt 19 Insulation Resistance any terminal to any terminal 40 C 95 RH 25 C 40 RH lt lt gt 108 gt 1010 Q Typical a Using the 44474A external increment amp channel closed display off 347 Chapter 9 Specifications 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Z Z 50Q or 75 Insertion Loss lt 10 MHz lt 0 3 dB Leen lt 100 MHz lt 0 7 dB O T PARN lt 500 MHz lt 1 5dB lt 1 3 GHz lt 3 0 dB lt 10 MHz lt 0 2 dB caso avarice 00 osa lt 1 3 GHz lt 1 9dB Crosstalk Channel Channel Channel ee eH a Common lt 500 MHz lt 65 dB with 1 channel closed lt 1 3 GHz lt 55 dB lt 10 MHZ lt 90 dB Group Group Module Module kr i 7 lt 1 3 GHz lt 60 dB lt 10 MHz lt 1 20 lt 100 MHz lt 1 25 VSWR lt 500 MHz lt 1 35 lt 1 3 GHz lt 1 55 Capacitance Center Center lt 0 006 pF p 3 Center Shield lt 60 pF Rise Time lt 300 ps Signal Delay lt 3 ns channel
237. r Module Configuring a Multiplexer Module The Agilent N2260A and N2266A 40 Channel MUX modules can be flexibly configured Configurations possible include 80 channel 1 wire 40 channel 2 wire dual 20 channel 2 wire 20 channel 4 wire At power on or after a reset the MUX module will be configured as a 40 channel 2 wire MUX module default setting When configured to be an 80 channel 1 wire module only one channel can be closed at a time For more information about the N2260A see page 176 For more information about the N2266A see page 200 Front Panel Operation Select the slot in which an N2260A or N2266A is installed press Mode the CONFIG annunciator lights up Select the desired function mode i e 1 wire mode Press Enter CONFIG MUX 1 M WIRE1 1 Remote Interface Operation A command parameter sets the operational mode of the multiplexer This parameter can take one of the following values WIRE1 WIRE2 BIWIRE2 or WIRE4 ROUTe FUNCtion 1 WIRE1 Configure the module in slot 1 to be 1 wire mode 83 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Parallel Switching Parallel Switching While traditional switch control systems open close relays in sequence the 3499A B C uses an innovative parallel driving circuit to open close switches simultaneously The parallel operation of the 3499A B C significantly increases the test throughput of an automated test syste
238. r suffix is the number that can be appended to the end of some command headers This error is generated if the header suffix contains more than 12 characters Suffix not allowed A suffix was received following a numeric parameter You may have misspelled the suffix Character data not allowed A discrete parameter was received but a character string or a numeric parameter was expected Check the list of parameters to verify that you have used a valid parameter type Examples ROUTE CLOSE CH101 or DIAG DISP TEXT123 the string must be enclosed in quotes Invalid string data An invalid character string was received Check to see if you have enclosed the character string in quotation marks and verify that the string contains valid ASCII characters Example DIAG DISP TESTING the ending quote is missing String data not allowed A character string was received but is not allowed for this command Check the list of parameters to verify that you have used a valid parameter type 168 161 168 178 222 223 224 310 350 410 Chapter 6 Error Messages Execution Errors Invalid block data For a definite length block the number of types of data sent does not match the number of bytes that you specified in the block header Block data not allowed Data was sent to the instrument in SCPI definite length block format but this command does not accept this format Expression data not all
239. rcuits as shown in the simplified schematic below Each input has its own pull up resistor allowing easy detection of external termination grounded or open circuited status Each output driver is capable of sinking an externally supplied current up to 600 mA making it possible to control relays without the need for additional driver circuitry OO eh Ne eo N A ea Ne a ch ela heh one ee anes ee OPEN COLLECTOR m ONE I O LINE CURRENT SINK 4 VMOS FET 5V V fo 10K i TERMINAL o e pie gt i CONNECTION DRIVER OUTPUT x 60v y i INPUT SENSE Tid REFERENCE VOLTAGE 5V 5V PCTL or I O Handshake Signal 10K 25 Resetable fuse TERMINAL E BLOCK 7 H V V PFLG Handshake Signal TSV py A 10K Resetable fuse CONNECTION i Q gt BLOCK 189 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2263A 32 bit Digital I O Module N2263A Wiring Information There are four methods available to connect to the N2263A A screw terminal block the N2293A described on page 277 A direct wiring insulation displacement connector the N2296A described on page 278 A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable the N2297A described on page 279 A DIN96 to four D25 Cable the N2299A described on page 281 The screw terminal block N2293A is shown below To use the other connection options you will need to use the pinout information on page 191 CONNECT TO P702 jf
240. rd This User s Manual One Quick Reference Guide One Tie Down Clip 03499 21002 for Agilent 3499B only Any plug in modules that you ordered are delivered in separate shipping containers 2 Connect the power cord and turn on the instrument 1 Connect the 3499A B C to an AC power source with the supplied power cord 2 Push the Power switch located on the lower left side of the front Power G panel 3 On power up every segment in the display will light up briefly including all annunciators Following this starburst display the internal self test will begin 4 If the self test passes the default system mode and the GPIB address are displayed together with a beep sound Then the display shows the instrument model number and the active slot slot 0 SCPI GPIB 9 3499 0 1 Tf the self test failed the failure will be displayed on the front panel For details of all self test errors refer to Error Messages starting on page 165 15 Note Chapter 1 Quick Start To Prepare the Instrument for Use When shipped from the factory the SCPI mode and the GPIB interface address of 9 are used Slot 0 refers to the built in controller board of the switch control system If the Instrument Does Not Turn On 1 Verify that the power cord is firmly plugged into the power receptacle on the rear panel of the 3499A B C 2 Make sure that the power source the 3499A B C
241. recent are discarded SYSTem VERSion This query returns a string indicating the SCPI version implemented on the mainframe control board The string is in the form Version A 02 00 SYSTem CTYPE lt slot gt This query returns a string containing the module identification in the specified slot The slot parameter is a decimal ranging from 0 to 9 mainframe dependent Valid slot numbers are 3499A slots 0 through 5 3499B slots 0 through 2 3499C slots 0 through 9 153 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference System Information Commands The string returned has one of the following forms Module Returned String Empty Slot NO CARD 00000 Mainframe Built in DIO 3499 Serial N2260A 40CH MUX N2260A Serial N2261A 40CH GP N2261A Serial N2262A 4X8 MATRIX N2262A Serial N2263A 32BIT DIO N2263A Serial N2264A 12 3 5A CH GP 16BIT DIO N2264A Serial N2265A 4X4 MATRIX 16BIT DIO N2265A Serial N2266A 20CH MUX N2266A Serial N2267A 8 8A CH GP N2267A Serial N2268A DUAL 1X4 RF MUX N2268A N2270A 10 1000V CH MUX N2270A Serial N2272A RF MUX N2272A N2276A B Dual MICROWV MUX N2276A B Serial N2280A QUAD 1X2 OPTICAL N2280A Serial N2281A DUAL 1X4 OPTICAL N2281A Serial N2282A 1X8 OPTICAL MUX N2282A Serial 44470A RELAY MUX 44470 44470D RELAY MUX 44470 44471A GP RELAY 44471 44471D GP RELAY 44471 44472A VHF SW 44472 44473A MATRIX SW 44473 44474A DIGITAL IO 44474 44475A
242. right arrow key For example if an N2260A 40 channel MUX module is installed in slot 1 pressing the right arrow key will show the module name and slot number N2260A 1 Turning the knob will then step through the individual channels on that module MUX OPEN 100 20 Chapter 1 Quick Start Basic Operation To Open or Close a Channel When a channel is selected you can open or close the channel using the front panel keys For example with an N2260A 40 channel MUX installed in slot 1 select channel 00 as described on the previous page MUX OPEN 100 Press the CLOSE key to close the channel MUX CLOSED 100 Press the OPEN key to open the channel MUX OPEN 100 In this manner you can select and control as many channels as you need The N2260A has 40 channels numbered 0 through 39 in slot 1 100 through 139 You may also select additional plug in modules and channels by turning the knob 21 Card Reset Reset Card Reset Chapter 1 Quick Start Basic Operation To Open All Channels on a Module You can open individual channels on a module one at a time as described above There are times however when it would be more expedient to open all channels on a module at once Use the arrow keys to select the module to work with You cannot have an individual channel selected for this operation For example select the module in slot 1 using the N2260
243. rnal Triggering Two control lines are provided in the rear panel mini DIN connector external trigger in and external trigger out These lines can be used individually or combined to synchronize a scan list with an external instrument such as a DMM The figure below shows this connection The 3499A B C can be configured to output a trigger pulse to notify the external instrument whenever a channel is closed The arm or trigger source is then configured as either EXT or MIX so that the 3499A B C can receive the notification from the external instrument to advance to the next channel in the scan list Agilent 3499B External DMM fe leo gt r gi o Ca ry j Ao oo VM Complete sill Ext Trig In Ext Trig In In addition to the Ext Trig In and Ext Trig Out pair provided on the rear panel of the mainframe the EI external increment and CC channel closed pair on a 44474A module see page 248 can also be used to synchronize Specify either Slot 0 or the slot in which a 44474A module is installed to indicate which lines are to be used Both the built in trigger lines and the EI CC lines on the 44474A are TTL compatible Once enabled the selected trigger in line is immediately ready to accept the trigger signal from the external instrument Enabling or disabling a trigger source from the front panel sets bo
244. rom the circuit board 3 Assemble the hardware The table below lists the hardware parts that are supplied with the 44475A An assembly diagram is given on the next page Part Number Description 44475 26501 Breadboard circuit board 03488 00602 Bottom shield 03488 00603 Top shield component side 1251 8645 2 rows x 15 pins right angle connector small connector 44475 62102 2 rows x 11 pins right angle connector large connector 44475 62101 Terminal Block keyed for the breadboard connector 5040 5193 Connector Housing 0515 5194 Cable Clamp 0515 0063 Pan Head screw 2 5 x 12 metric 0515 0843 Flat Head screw 2 5 x 20 Lock metric 0515 0045 Pan Head screw 3 x 18 Lock metric 0535 0004 Hex Nut 3 x 0 5 0535 0008 Hex Nut 2 5 x 0 45 2190 0583 Lock Washer 2190 0584 Lock Washer 255 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44475A Breadboard Module 4 0515 0843 FLAT HEAD SCREW 03488 00603 COMPONENT SHIELD 0535 0008 HEX NUT 2 2190 0583 LOCK WASHER 2 0515 0063 PANHEAD SCREW 2 4251 8645 2 X 15 CONNECTOR 44475 26501 CIRCUIT BOARD 44475 62102 2 X 11 CONNECTOR SHOWN COMPONENT SIDE UP 2190 0584 LOCK WASHER 2 _ 2 0535 0004 HEX NUT 03488 00602 CIRCUIT SHIELD 3480 41 58 256 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44476A Microwave Switch Module 44476A Microwave Switch Module The 44
245. rough channel 39 Additional information about parallel switching is given on page 84 Specifications for the Agilent N2261A are given on page 305 N2261A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The N2261A contains 40 independent Single Pole Single Throw SPST Form A latching relays A channel refers to an individual relay on the module Channels are numbered 00 through 39 for the N2261A N2261A GP Relay Module Terminal Block oot D ons H CH39 o g 3 e e e e e e on QL 2 H CH20 o g CH20 TE L 1 H CH19 o n 1 e e e e e e eo H CHOO d CHOO 182 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module N2261A Wiring Information There are four methods available to connect to the N2261A A screw terminal block the N2291A described on page 277 A direct wiring insulation displacement connector the N2296A described on page 278 A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable the N2297A described on page 279 A DIN96 to four D25 Cable the N2299A described on page 281 The screw terminal block N2291A is shown below To use the other connection options you will need to use the pinout information on page 184
246. rranty terms in the separate agreement will control Technologies Licenses The hardware and or software described in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Restricted Rights Legend Tf software is for use in the performance of a U S Government prime contract or subcontract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer soft ware as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause Use duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commer cial license terms and non DOD Departments and Agencies of the U S Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 June 1987 U S Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as applicable in any technical data Safety Notices Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product Return the product to an Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained WARNING A WARNING notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to
247. s about 0 5 second s delay during power up Your 3499A C may seem to turn on slower after you add N2276A modules An 8 bit DIP switch on the module sets the configuration for the switches and attenuators Four connectors are located on the module two 16 pin connectors labeled as switchO amp switch1 for connecting switches and two 10 pin connectors labeled as attenuatorO amp attenuator1 for connecting attenuators The Agilent N2276A can only be used with the SCPI Mode of 3499A C Firmware Revision 3 0 or later See page 59 for details about the firmware revisions The driving circuitry of the module is capacitive Turn off power before installing or removing the module switches or attenuators Specifications for the N2276A are given on page 325 217 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2276A Dual 1 to 6 4 Microwave MUX Attenuator Module Up to two attenuators can be added to the N2272A using provided ribbon cables The following attenuators user provided are available from Agilent External Attenuators up to two may be used 0 to 11 dB in 1 dB steps Agilent 84904K up to 26 5 GHz Agilent 84904L up to 40 GHz 0 to 90 dB in 10 dB steps Agilent 84906K up to 26 5 GHz Agilent 84906L up to 40 GHz 0 to 70 dB in 10 GB steps Agilent 84907K up to 26 5 GHz Agilent 84907L up to 40 GHz N2276A Simplified Schematic The simplified schematic below shows the Agilent 87106B 1 to 6 microwave switch option 206 as used in the A
248. s in same order as in the scan_list and in the form of snn snn mm where snn is the channel number and mm is a stored channel setup The ROUTe SCAN CLEar command clears the scan list This command has no effect on the scan configurations except clearing all the channels bits or the stored channel setups included in the lt scan_list gt The ROUTe SCAN SIZE query returns the number of channels in the scan_list The returned value is an integer number between 0 and 200 A stored setup in the scan is counted as one channel 133 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Scanning Commands Scan Configuration Commands These command set the arm and trigger layer parameters See The Scan Process on page 86 for a complete description of the layers and scan configuration process ARM SOURce lt BUS EXTernal IMMediate TIMer MIX HOLD gt SOURCe This command specifies the event control source for the arm layer A complete description of the arm layer and how it relates to scanning begins on page 85 The ARM source can be specified to be one of the following BUS the sweep of the scan list starts after a TRG or GET is received EXTernal the sweep of scan list starts after an external trigger is received IMMediate the sweep of scan starts immediately after INITiate or the end of a scan if multiple scans are specified TIMer the sweep of the scan list starts after the timer interval MIX t
249. s terminated and the instrument returns to the idle state 86 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning Idle State The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever it is not operating within any one of the layers When the instrument is taken out of the idle state the SCAN annunciator lights up and operation proceeds to the arm layer From the remote interface the INITiate command takes the instrument out of the idle state Arm Layer The instrument requires an arm source to allow operation to proceed into the trigger layer You can select the arm source from the following TIMER with timer arm source selected the instrument will not proceed to the trigger layer unless the specified time interval has elapsed IMM with IMM default arm source selected operation immediately proceeds to the trigger layer as soon as the instrument is taken out of the idle state BUS with bus arm source selected the instrument will not proceed to the trigger layer unless a GET or a TRG command is received or Step on the front panel is pressed EXT with external EXT arm source selected the instrument will not proceed to the trigger layer unless an external trigger is received from the specified trigger in line MIX with mix arm source selected the instrument will not proceed to the trigger layer unless a BUS event or EXTernal event occurs HOLD with hold arm source selected the instrument will
250. seconds with a 1 ms resolution You can select any one of the six trigger sources listed on page 88 to advance to the next channel in the scan list IMM immediate is the default trigger source If TIMer trigger source is selected the elapsed time can be set from 0 to 99999 999 seconds with a 1 ms resolution You can specify the number of times between 1 and 99999 the instrument is to sweep through the scan list When the specified number is reached the scan stops You can specify a delay time from 0 to 99999 999 seconds with 1 ms resolution between when a channel is closed and when the next operation begins and if configured a trigger out pulse is sent The delay time can be set individually for each channel in the scan list or one delay can be set for all channels in the scan list Note that even if the trigger source is set to IMMediate the scan list will not advance until the delay time is met When you are using the trigger source TIMer and a delay time they have a relationship as shown in the following diagram If you set the delay time longer than the TIMer interval the scan list will not advance until the delay time is met gS S S S 2 Y g S oO Delay time Timer 90 CONFIG SCAN ARM IMM COUNT 00001 TRIG IMM DELAY TIME SET ALL 00000 0000 SECS 3499 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning
251. selected by the mainframe for individual modules Additional time from 0 to 99999 999 seconds can be added in 1 ms steps Arm Source External trigger from the rear panel Mini DIN connector IEEE 488 bus GET TRG or pressing Step from the front panel Software TRIGger IMM Internal timer programmable as 0 to 99999 999 seconds in 1 ms steps Trigger Source External trigger from the rear panel Mini DIN connector IEEE 488 bus GET TRG or pressing Step from the front panel Software Trigger IMM Internal timer programmable as 0 to 99999 999 seconds in 1 ms steps External Trigger Input Level TTL compatible Minimum trigger pulse width 2 us Maximum external trigger delay 2 ms External Trigger Output Level Normally pull up to 5 V Sink current 10 mA V Low lt 0 4V 80 mA V Low lt 0 8V Low going pulse width 10 us typical Input TTL compatible Sain S Output Vo high gt 2 4V l 1 MA Vo Low lt 0 8V lp 100 mA g i Maximum V 42V with external pull up E SYSTEM SPEED Scan Speed 350 chans sec N2266A Parser Time Open 100 3 ms Close 100 3 ms Open 100 139 4 ms Switching Speed Channels Time ms Open Close 1 7 1 N2266A Open Close 10 22 0 N2266A in the same group Open Close 40 28 9 N2266A Digital I O Block Transfer Rate 20K bytes sec long word a Maximum time from activation of extern
252. sssrssstesesste A View from the Pin Side of the Connector Pin A B Cc Pin A B Cc 1 BIT30 BIT31 BIT32 17 CH6_L CH7_L CH8_L 2 GND GND GND 18 CH6_H CH7_H CH8_H 3 BIT33 BIT34 BIT35 19 CH9_L CH10_L CH11_L 4 BIT36 BIT37 GND 20 CH9_H CH10_H CH11_H 5 GND GND GND 21 CH20 L CH20 L CH20_L 6 BIT38 BIT39 BIT40 22 CH20_L CH20_L CH20_L 7 GND GND GND 23 CH20_H CH20_H CH20_H 8 BIT41 BIT42 BIT43 24 CH20_H CH20_H CH20_H 9 BIT44 BIT45 GND 25 CH21_L CH21_L CH21_L 10 1 O PCTL PFLG 26 CH21_L CH21_L CH21_L 11 GND GND GND 27 CH21_H CH21_H CH21_H 12 Not used Not used Not used 28 CH21_H CH21_H CH21_H 13 CHO_L CH1_L CH2_L 29 CH22 L CH22 L CH22_L 14 CHO_H CH1_H CH2_H 30 CH22 L CH22 L CH22_L 15 CH3_L CH4_L CH5_L 31 CH22_H CH22_H CH22_H 16 CH3_H CH4_H CH5_H 32 CH22_H CH22_H CH22_H 195 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2265A Multifunction Module N2265A Multifunction Module The Agilent N2265A is a multifunction module which consists of A4x 4 2 wire Matrix module 16 latching relays and A 16 bit digital I O module The parallel switching feature makes the matrix portion of this module well suited for high speed switching applications Up to eight 2 wire node crosspoint relays in the same row can be closed all at once parallel switching Additional information about parallel switching is given on page 84 Five handshaking modes are available for the digital I O function The
253. st Front Panel Operation Press S List the CONFIG annunciator will light The display will show ADD TO SCAN Press Enter to begin building the scan list Select each desired channel and press Enter to add the channel to the scan list As channels are added an asterisk is shown in the display to indicate the channel is a part of the scan list ADD TO SCAN Press S List Press Enter SELECT 101 Select a channel to add SELECT 401 Press Enter SELECT 203 Select the next channel to add Remote Interface Operation You may use single channels ranges of channel or stored setups in the scan list Set up a scan list with one command as follows ROUTe SCAN 100 104 109 411 1 Create scan list to include channel 100 channels 104 through 109 bit channel 411 and stored state 1 Stored states may be used in scan lists Stored states are discussed in more detail beginning on page 106 89 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Scanning Configuring a Scan The scan procedure is controlled by specifying an arm source a trigger source and the number of sweeps a sweep is one pass through the scan list Delay times can also be configured You can select any one of the six arm sources listed on page 87 to control the onset of each sweep through the scan list IMM immediate is the default arm source If TIMer arm source is selected the elapsed time can be set from 0 to 99999 999
254. stem 57 Chapter 3 System Overview Mainframes Overview Mainframes Overview Three mainframes are available Slots Available Rack Width 3499A 5 full width 3499B 2 half width 3499C 9 full width 1 The 3499C is designed to accommodate multiple width plug in modules and has 9 logical slots but 14 mechanical slots Slots 1 through 6 are 1 slot wide slot 7 is 2 slots wide and slots 8 and 9 are each 3 slots wide See the figure on page 7 for more information All mainframes can be either operated from the front panel or programed over a remote interface GPIB or RS 232 The mainframes can be operated in either of two system modes SCPI mode or 3488A mode The SCPI mode allows the full realization of performance potentials and advanced features such as parallel operation of multiple relays on multiple modules The 3488A mode is included for backward compatibility with the legacy Agilent 3488A system This manual documents the SCPI mode of operation For information about the 3488 programming mode please visit www agilent com 58 Chapter 3 System Overview Firmware and Control Module Description Firmware and Control Module Description The Agilent 3499A B C and this manual support two versions of the Agilent 3499A B C control module and four versions of firmware Firmware revisions and control module versions can be queried either by front panel operation or using the remote interface See page 52 for a pr
255. t To power on the instrument press the power switch on the front panel If the instrument is powered up for the first time the instrument will use the factory default settings as shown on page 74 Otherwise the instrument will power on to the state specified Refer to To Configure the Power on State on page 44 for more details To Monitor a Channel or a Slot You can continuously monitor the current status of a particular switching channel a digital I O port or an entire plug in module Monitoring from the front panel is especially useful when developing and debugging remote interface commands 1 Press the monitor key the MON annunciator lights up to indicate the instrument is in the monitoring state 2 Select the slot or the channel port to be monitored The displayed information depends on the selected module type Typical displays are shown in the table on page 81 3 If only part of the channel status on the module can be displayed at one time press Enter to display the next part For multiplexer modules and GP Relay modules 10 channels can be displayed at one time for matrix modules one Row or one Column can be displayed at one time for digital I O modules two 8 bit ports can be displayed at one time For multifunction modules the first function on the module is displayed then the next 4 Press the monitor key again to end monitoring the MON annunciator turns off The built in digital I O bits port on
256. t 10 Q Channel Channel lt 40 C 95 RH gt 109Q with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 40 C 60 RH gt 5x10 Q lt 40 C 95 RH gt 10 Q with 1 channel closed a Using the 44474A external increment amp channel closed display off 345 Chapter 9 Specifications 44477A Form C Relay Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Capacitance Open Channel Channel Channel lt 10 pF with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 25 pF Insertion Loss Ls E with 50Q termination a 10 MHz lt 0 50 dB l 100 kHz lt 73 dB E T BUE es 10 MHz lt 33 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 346 Chapter 9 Specifications 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules 44478A B 1 3 GHz Dual 4 to 1 MUX Modules Specifications in the table describe the modules warranted performance over the temperature range 0 to 55 C Information marked by the Typical designation is helpful in applying the modules but is non warranted information E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels Dual 4 Chans Maximum Voltage Any Center Shield to Any Other Center Shield Chassis 42 V dc ac peak Maximum Current Maximum Power Characteristic Impedance Relay Life Typical Per Channel or Common Per Channel o
257. t Input Card Pair None None Scan Related Scanning None Stop scan in progress Scan List Empty Empty ARM SOURce IMMediate IMMediate ARM TIMer seconds 0 0 Arm Count 1 1 TRIGger SOURce IMMediate IMMediate TRIGger TlMer seconds 0 0 Channel Delay seconds 0 0 Trigger Out Pulse Disabled Disabled a Current setting includes the selection of an interface as well as the settings for the interface 75 Chapter 3 System Overview Factory Default and Reset States 3488 Mode Defaults Item Factory Default Reset Interface GPIB 488 GPIB Address 9 Keep current setting RS 2325 Keep current setting System Mode SCPI Mode SCPI Mode Keep current setting 3488A Mode Keep current setting System Related Display State On On Stored State Empty Keep current setting Error Queue Empty Cleared Module Related Switching Channels Open Open Digital I O Ports Input Input Card Pair None None Scan Related Scanning None Stop scan in progress Scan List Empty Empty Channel Delay 0 0 seconds Trigger Out Pulse Disabled Disabled a Current setting includes the selection of the GPIB interface and its address setting b RS 232 interface CANNOT be used in 3488A mode 76 Features and Functions Features and Functions This chapter provides details about particular functions and features of the Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System The sections in this
258. t com DoC search htm You can then search by product number to find the latest Declaration of Conformity Alternately you can go to the product web page www agilent com find 3499A click on the Document Library tab then scroll down until you find the Declara tion of Conformity link Agilent Technologies Inc Printed in Malaysia Revision F October 2012 E1012 User s Manual 03499 90017 oth Agilent Technologies
259. t parameter is plug in module dependent Valid port numbers for each plug in module are shown beginning on page 70 SOURce DIGital DATA BIT lt bit port gt lt 0 1 gt This command sets a bit in the specified bit_port bit_port is in the form of snn where s is the slot number and nn is the bit number The built in 4 bit digital I O port has bit numbers 091 to 094 The plug in module bit numbers are module dependent see page 70 143 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Digital I O Commands SOURce DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt VALue lt port gt lt data gt This command sets a value on the specified port data is a decimal value representing the desired bit pattern The value of data depends upon the first parameter as follows BYTE writes 8 bits to the specified port 16 or 32 bit modules will be used as two or four 8 bit ports respectively data can range from 0 to 255 00 and FF If writing to the built in 4 bit digital I O port port 090 data can range from 0 to 15 WORD writes 16 bits to the specified port 16 or 32 bit modules will be used as one or two 16 bit ports respectively data can range from 32768 to 32767 8000 and 7FFF Values above 32767 must be converted to the 2 s complement form and sent as negative numbers LWORD writes 32 bits to the specified port This parameter is only valid on 32 bit modules data can range from 2 and 2 1 80000000 and 7
260. ted below Microwave Switch Ports Frequency 8762A 3 DC 4 GHz 8762B 3 DC 18 GHz 8762C 3 DC 26 5 GHz 8762F4 3 DC 4 GHz 8763B 4 DC 18 GHz 8763C 4 DC 26 5 GHz 8764B 5 DC 18 GHz 8764C 5 DC 26 5 GHz a Except the 8762F Microwave Switch with 75 Q characteristic impedance all others are 50 Q The 3499A B C identifies this module as a 44471A on the front panel display Changing the state of channels other than channels 00 through 02 does not generate an error but has no effect Specifications for the 44476B are dependent upon the switches used Refer to the switch data sheets for more information 260 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44476B Microwave Switch Module The 44476B is shown below CHANNEL 00 5 CHANNEL 01 5 CHANNEL 02 138447 NL Sea 20689 8164 IF6YI ozea cass TIE EG EDISE o e T amp ee o S69 ot6a Ga L a M 0689 2064 SRE cain ae camm pepavrecre ams 063 Org6ns2699 ause a he 3e TULL o 261 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44476B Microwave Switch Module 44476B Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic of the 44476B is shown below You must provide your own microwave switches and mount them on the assembly The channel are numbered channels 00 and 01 DRIVE FORM C JUMPERS DRIVE RELAYS pa ie m 1 pA ORG Moore 1 i T i i if i i NO i Koor 2 i yel INSTALLED f i l CHANNEL 5
261. ter 4 Features and Functions Display Control Display Control You can turn off the 3499A B C display for security or increased processing speed for example You can also write a message of up to 13 characters to the front panel display Note The display cannot be turned off from the front panel When the display is turned off the entire front panel display goes blank except for the ADRS and RMT annunciators the ERROR annunciator will also be on if there are errors and all keys except Local are locked If the display is turned off pressing Local causes the instrument to return to local operation the display will be turned back on The display is automatically turned on when power is cycled or after a RST command When the display is on you can send a message up to 13 characters to display on the front panel from the remote interface If you attempt to send more than 13 characters only the first 13 characters can be displayed The characters can be letters A Z numbers 0 9 and some special characters space 3 Remote Interface Operation DIAGnostic DISPlay STATe OFF Turn off the display DIAGnostic DISPlay STATe ON Turn on the display DIAGnostic DISPlay Scan finished Display the message on the front panel 110 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Relay Cycle Counts Relay Cycle Counts The Agilent 3499A B C can read and track the relay cycle counts
262. ter to select the interface and show the first parameter 9600 BAUD Turn the knob until the desired baud rate is displayed 19200 BAUD Press Enter to select the baud rate and show the second parameter NONE 8 BITS 49 O i O Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure the Remote Interface 7 Turn the knob until the desired parity and data bits default NONE 8 BITS is displayed EVEN 7 BITS 8 Press Enter to select the parity and data bits and show the fourth parameter FLOW NONE 9 Turn the knob until the desired mode is displayed FLOW RTS CTS 10 Press Enter to select the parity and data bits and return to the first level of the Menu menu INTERFACE 11 Press Menu again to exit the menu The CONFIG annunciator turns off 50 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Perform a Self test To Perform a Self test The self test feature of the instrument provides you with a method of verifying proper instrument operation 1 Press the Menu key The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the first level menu is shown CARD PAIR 2 Turn the knob to select SELFTEST SELFTEST 3 Press Enter The self test will begin The display will briefly show a starburst pattern all display segments lit Following the pattern the display indicates TEST while the intern
263. test error occurred T pevce Error 16 error numbers in the 300 range 5 Query Error 32 An error during a query error numbers in the 400 range 6 Not Used 64 Returns 0 All commands prior to and including OPC 7 Operation Complete 128 have beenexec ted ESE lt unmask gt ESE These commands work with the enable register The enable register is a mask used to determine which bits in the event register can be recorded in the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register unmask can range from 1 to 128 The query form of this command returns a decimal weighted value indicating the currently set bits in this register 151 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Status System Commands The Status Byte Register The Status Byte Register reports conditions from the other register groups Data in the 3499A B C output buffer is reported on the MAV bit bit 4 If an event is cleared in one of the other registers it is also cleared in the Status Byte register The CLS command clears the Status Byte register STB This query reads the status byte The returned value is a decimal weighted summary of the bits in the register SRE lt value gt SRE These commands work with the enable register The enable register is a mask used to determine which bits in the event register can be summarized to the RQS bit bit 6 of the Status Byte Register value can range from 1 to 128 The query form of this command
264. th option 006 has two female 2 92 mm connectors compatible with SMA connectors When using 84904 6 7L series attenuators be sure to order them with option 006 SMA compatible for wiring convenience The default ribbon cable for connecting attenuators to N2276A B is 1 5 m in length A 1 5 m length ribbon cable for connecting microwave switches to the switch connectors on the N2276A is available as Agilent part number N2276 61003 This cable permits the microwave switches to be placed in a convenient location AUX Port Oyie Agilent N2276 MICROWAVE SWITCH 220 Note Caution Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module The Agilent N2276B contains microwave switch and attenuator driver circuits The microwave switches or attenuators can be mounted to the rear panel of the module or connected with an auxiliary cable for convenience The N2276B is shipped without any switches allowing for custom configuration Several microwave switches and attenuators are available for use with the module The N2276B is a three slot module and cannot be used in the 3499B two slot mainframe Due to the drive circuitry each N2276B causes about 0 5 second s delay during power up Your 3499A C may seem to turn on slower after you add N2276B modules An 8 bit DIP switch on the module sets the configuration for the switches and attenuators Four connectors are locat
265. th the trigger in and trigger out functions On the remote interface the trigger out function can be controlled independently 93 Chapter 4 Feature Scanning s and Functions Front Panel Operation Press Menu use the knob to select CONF EXT TRIG and press Enter Select either slot 0 built in external trigge Enter Enable Press the Men Press S List s r or the slot where a 44474A is installed and press or disable the pair of trigger lines and press Enter u key again to exit the menu elect CONFIG SCAN and configure the arm source or trigger source as either EXT or MIX Remote Interfa the 3499A B C ce Operation The following code segment will set up to synchronize with an external instrument CONFigure EXTernal TRIGger SOURce 0 Select to use the built in ext trig in and ext trig out lines CONFigure EXTernal TRIGger OUTPut 1 Enable to output a trigger pulse on the ext trig out line ARM SOURce EXT Set arm source to EXT TRIGger SOURce EXT Set trigger source to EXT 94 Note Chapter 4 Features and Functions Digital I O Operation Digital I O Operation The digital input output is well suited for monitoring and controlling external devices You may use the built in digital I O bits or port on the rear panel one or more digital I O modules or a multifunction modules with a DIO function In the following context multifunction modules refer t
266. the RS 232 connector When the line goes true the instrument sends data over the interface When the line goes false the instrument stops sending information typically within six characters The instrument sets the DTR line false when the input buffer is almost full approximately 100 characters and releases the line when space is available again RTS CTS This mode operates the same as the DTR DSR mode but uses the RTS request to send and CTS clear to send lines on the RS 232 connector instead When the CTS line goes true the instrument sends data over the interface When the line goes false the instrument stops sending information typically within six characters The instrument sets the RTS line false when the input buffer is almost full approximately 100 characters and releases the line when space is available again Changing the instrument system mode SCPI or 3488 causes the instrument to select the GPIB interface and its address setting 48 To set the RS 232 interface i A oO 1 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Configure the Remote Interface Press the Menu key The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the first level menu is shown CARD PAIR Turn the knob to select INTERFACE in the menu INTERFACE Press Enter to show the second level menu The active interface is shown If necessary turn the knob until RS 232 is displayed RS 232 Press En
267. this module are rated for a maximum open circuit voltage of 250 volts dc or ac rms Maximum current per relay is 2 amps dc or ac rms and maximum power per relay is 60 watts dc or 125 VA ac Maximum closed channel resistance is less than 2 Q The 44471A exhibits low thermal characteristics which make it ideal for independent non multiplexed signal switching It can be operated in either single channel break before make BBM or multiple channels closed at the same time Specifications for the 44471A are given on page 333 44471A Simplified Schematic A simplified schematic is shown below The 44471A consists of 10 independent Single Pole Single Throw SPST Form A relays Channels on the 44471A are numbered as 00 through 09 CH00 through CH09 44471A GP Relays Terminal Block gt Do L H CH09 lt CH09 gt H ee CHO8 L cHos gt H OT L cHo7 gt H H CH06 k K CH06 ae CHOS 4 re CHOS dir CHO4 L cuoa a ms E D CHO3 Mot H CHO2 4 5 A CH02 Cream onor oa cHoo gt H 236 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module Custom Signal Conditioning The 44471A circuit board has a provision to allow you to install simple attenuators or filters in the relay paths There is also a place to install relay contact protection networks The figure below shows the locations on the main c
268. tion N2327A Crimp and Insert Terminal Block This terminal is for the N2267A plug in module only Refer to the N2267A module wiring information page 208 for details about the connector and pin out assignments The figures below illustrate how to wire and assemble this terminal Stripped wire 14 18 AWG Socket a lt a __ A Prepare the Wire and the Socket a lt lt B Insert the Wire into the Socket SSS lt C Crimp the Wire with the Socket by using an AMP Hand Crimping Tool 90067 5 or equivalent tool i In Line Connector Insert wired Socket into the Connector u Tothe Nazara module w 1 282 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information N2320A Crimp and Insert Terminal Block This terminal block is for the N2270A plug in module only Refer to the N2270A module wiring information page 213 for details about the connector and pin out assignments The figures below illustrate how to wire and assemble this terminal Stripped wire 14 18 AWG Socket SS S k a lt t _ A Prepare the Wire and the Socket lt q_______ B Insert the Wire into the Socket lt C Crimp the Wire with the Socket by using an AMP Hand Crimping Tool 90067 5 or equivalent tool Release the four screws and uncover the upper metal shield Upper metal shield etal strain relief clamp ront view 283 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Ter
269. tion Arrow Keys Note The front panel shown above is the Agilent 3499B The 3499A and 3499C front panels are similar and have identical functionality The Display at a Glance 3499B SWITCH CONTROL SYSTEM ADRS RMT ERROR EXT ONCE AUTO MEM LAST MIN Annunciators Channel Slot Number CHANNEL PF FR A BB BR 4 gga MAX AVG SHIFT H1234L The display is divided into several areas The channel and slot number is always displayed on the right corner of the display The main area which is in the center of the display is primarily used to display channel status open or closed information messages menu items prompt infor mation error messages and so on Around the display are annunciators to indicate various states of the instrument operation The annunciators are summarized below Annunciator Indication SCAN Scan is initiated MON Instrument is in monitor mode VIEW Scan list errors or relay cycle counts are being viewed CONFIG Any configuration key has been pressed 7 Instrument is advancing a scan step ADRS Instrument is active on the remote interface RMT Instrument is in remote mode ERROR Error queue is not empty EXT Scan is waiting for external trigger source SHIFT Shift key has been pressed Other annunciators in the display are not used in the Agilent 3499A B C system The Rear Panel at a Glance The figure below shows the Agilent 349
270. tions include capacitor leakage connector switch contact and insulation resistance test systems To expand switching capacity or build special configurations the multiplexer switching modules can also be used with matrix or other switching modules The figure below shows a simple 1 x 4 Multiplexer gt Channel 1 Common Channel 2 O Channel 3 O Channel 4 Simple Multiplexer Switching 61 Chapter 3 System Overview Plug in Modules Overview Multiplexers are available in several types One Wire Single Ended Multiplexer for common LO measurements Two Wire Multiplexer for floating measurements Four Wire Multiplexer for resistance and RTD measurements Very High Frequency VHF Microwave Multiplexer for switching frequencies up to microwave 26 5 GHz The table below lists the available MUX modules Mainframe ali Module Name Slots Relay Description umber Type Required N2260A 40 Channel MUX 1 Latching Primarily a 40 channel 2 wire Module multiplexer switches both HI and LO inputs 200 V 1 A with DPST relays It can be configured as an 80 channel 1 wire two independent 20 channel 2 wire or a 20 channel 4 wire MUX module N2266A 40 Channel MUX 1 Reed non Primarily a 40 channel 2 wire Module latching multiplexer In SCPI mode it can be configured as an 80 channel 1 wire two independent 20 channel 2 wire or a 20 channel 4 wire MUX module Caution In order to stay with
271. to cancel the current write operation Note Data display format of individual 8 bit ports can be specified either in binary or decimal values refer to the procedure on page 34 Once specified the format applies to all input and output operations on the same port 32 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Use a Digital I O Port To Configure a Digital I O Module Digital I O modules can be configured for handshake modes and control line flag line and I O line polarity Use the Mode menu to configure digital I O parameters See Digital I O Operation on page 95 for detailed descriptions of the operating modes Only plug in modules can be configured this way the built in digital I O port control module can only be configured at the port level see page 34 The following procedure configures a plug in digital I O module to use a two line digital handshake mode mode 5 for data transfers 1 Select the slot in which a digital I O or multifunction module is installed The channel number is in the form of snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number N2263A 4 2 Press the Mode key The CONFIG annunciator lights up in the display and the first level menu is shown CONFIG DIO 4 3 Press Enter to begin the configuration The display shows the second level menu choice MODE 1 4 4 Turn the knob until the desired flow control mode i e MODE 5 is displayed The displ
272. trol system Specifications Chapter 9 lists the technical specifications for the mainframe and plug in modules If you have questions relating to the operation of the Agilent 3499A B C call 1 800 452 4844 in the United States or contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales Office If your 3499A B C fails within one year of purchase Agilent will either repair or replace it free of charge Call 1 877 447 7278 in the United States and ask for Agilent Express or contact your local Agilent Technologies Sales Office Contents Chapter 1 Quick Start 13 To Prepare the Instrument for Use 15 To Install a Module in the 3499A B C 17 Basic Operation 19 To Rack Mount the 3499A B C 23 Filler Panels 26 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation 27 To Power On the Instrument 29 To Monitor a Channel or a Slot 29 To Use a Digital I O Port 31 To View Instrument Errors 36 Scanning Operation 38 To Pair Two Modules Together 41 To Configure for External Trigger 42 To Configure the Power on State 44 To Configure the Remote Interface 46 To Perform a Self test 51 To Query the Firmware Revision 52 To Query the Serial Number 53 Local Remote Control 54 U9 U09 Chapter 3 System Overview 55 Agilent 3499A B C Switch Control System 57 Mainframes Overview 58 Firmware and Control Module Description 59 Plug in Modules Overview 61 Channel and Slot Addressing 70 Factory Default and Reset States 74
273. turns an integer between 231 and 231 1 80000000 and 7FFFFFFF Negative numbers returned are 2 s complement numbers Numbers greater than 32767 WORD and 2 1 LWORD will be returned as negative numbers When the returned data is negative you must calculate the actual bit state from the 2 s complement form 142 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference Digital O Commands SENSe DIGital DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt BLOCK lt port gt lt size gt This query returns block data Block data has the form lt digits gt lt length gt lt block gt where lt digits gt decides how many decimal digits are used to define lt length gt e lt length gt decides how many bytes are to be transferred in lt block gt lt block gt contains the actual data to be transferred lt block gt may contain from 1 to 2048 bytes The returned block will contain the number bytes specified in lt size gt The value of size will be the value of length in the returned block Set port to 090 to read blocks on the built in 4 bit digital I O port The first parameter sets the value returned If you omit the parameter BYTE data is assumed Digital Output Commands These commands set individual bits or complete ports Some digital I O configuration commands may affect how these bits are implemented The port parameter is in the form snn where s is the slot number and nn is the first channel on the digital port The por
274. twin D50 Cable 279 N2299A DIN96 to quad D25 cable 281 N2262A N2292A Screw Terminal Block 277 N2296A Direct wiring insulation displacement connector 278 N2298A DIN96 to D25 Cable 280 N2263A N2293A Screw Terminal Block 277 N2296A Direct wiring insulation displacement connector 278 N2297A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable 279 N2299A DIN96 to quad D25 cable 281 N2264A N2294A Screw Terminal Block 277 N2296A Direct wiring insulation displacement connector 278 N2297A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable 279 N2299A DIN96 to quad D25 cable 281 N2265A N2295A Screw Terminal Block 277 N2296A Direct wiring insulation displacement connector 278 N2297A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable 279 N2299A DIN96 to quad D25 cable 281 275 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules Terminals and Connections Information ac Available Terminal s Page N2266A N2290A Screw Terminal Block 277 N2296A Direct wiring insulation displacement connector 278 N2297A DIN9Y6 to twin D50 Cable 279 N2299A DIN96 to quad D25 cable 281 N2267A N2327A Crimp and Insert Kit 282 N2268A Rear Panel SMA Connectors 211 N2270A N2320A Crimp and Insert Kit 283 N2272A Rear Panel BNC Connectors 215 N2276A B Rear Panel SMA Connectors on switches or attenuators 220 N2280A Rear Panel SC APC Connectors 225 N2281A Rear Panel SC APC Connectors 227 N2282A Rear Panel SC APC Connectors 229 44470A 44480A Screw Terminal Connector Block 285 44470D 44
275. typical 0 03 dB after 10 switchings Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec Connector SMA E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE Isolation DC 18 GHz gt 90 dB Insertion Loss DC 2 GHz lt 0 25 dB DC 18 GHz lt 0 50 dB DC 2 GHz lt 1 15 dB SWR 3 mm SMA DC 12 4 GHz lt 1 25 dB DC 18 0 GHz lt 1 40 dB a Using the 44474A External Increment amp Channel Closed display off 44476B Microwave Switch Module The switching and attenuation characteristics of the 44476B are determined by the switches and attenuators installed in it Please refer to the switch s and or attenuator s data sheet for the specifications of your customized 44476B module 344 Chapter 9 Specifications 44477A Form C Relay Module 44477A Form C Relay Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 7 Maximum Voltage Terminal Terminal or Terminal Chassis 250 V dc or ac rms 350 V ac peak Maximum Current Per Channel 2 A dc or ac rms Smu Per Module 14 A dc or ac rms Maxim m Power Per Channel 60 W dc 500 VA ac AMN Per Module 420 W dc 3500 VA ac Maximum Overvoltage 1400 Vpk Transients Thermal Offset lt 3 uV per channel Initial Closed Channel lt 19 Resistance Relay Life Dry Load of lt 300 mA amp lt 10 V 108 VENS Maximum Rated Load 105 Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION Open Channel lt 40 C 60 RH g
276. uage About the SCPI Language Common Commands The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the common commands that perform functions such as reset self test status byte query and so on Common commands are four or five characters in length always begin with an asterisk and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character Some examples of common commands are shown below RST ESE 32 STB SCPI Command Format The SCPI commands perform functions like closing opening switches making measurements querying instrument states or retrieving data A subsystem command structure is a hierarchical structure that usually consists of a top level or root command one or more lower level commands and their parameters The following example shows part of a typical subsystem ROUTe CLOSe lt channel_list gt SCAN lt scan_list gt SCAN SIZE ROUTe is the root command CLOSe and SCAN are second level commands with parameters and SIZE is a third level command Command Separator A colon always separates a command from the next lower level command as shown below ROUTe SCAN SIZE Colons separate the root command from the second level command ROUTe SCAN and the second level from the third level SCAN SIZE 161 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference About the SCPI Language Abbreviated Commands The command syntax shows most commands as
277. ued 10 POLarity lt slot gt Query the polarity of I O direction lines See page 141 10 POLarity lt slot gt lt polarity gt Set the polarity of I O direction lines See page 141 DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt POLarity lt port gt lt 0 1 POS NEG gt Set the polarity of a port See page 141 DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt POLarity lt port gt Query the polarity of a digital I O port See page 141 DATA BIT lt bit_port gt lt 0 1 gt Write a 0 1 to a digital I O bit_port See page 1438 DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt VALue lt port gt lt data gt Write a data to the specified port See page 144 DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt BLOCK lt port gt lt block_data gt Write a block of data to the specified port See page 144 DATA lt BYTE WORD LWORD gt TRACE lt port gt lt sys_mem_name gt Write the data block in system memory to the specified digital I O port See page 145 TRACe DEFine lt sys_mem_name gt lt size gt lt fill gt Define the size of data block See page 145 TRACe DEFine lt sys_mem_name gt Query the size of data block See page 145 TRACe CATalog Query the defined system memory name See page 145 TRACe DATA lt sys_mem_name gt lt block data gt Write data to the data block in memory See page 145 TRACe DELete NAME lt sys_mem_name gt Remove one data block in system memory See page 145 TRACe DELete ALL
278. uery are used to synchronize the instrument with the bus controller Use the OPC command to set the bit in the Standard Event Register see page 151 if you are using the SCPI status system The bit is set when the command has finished executing Use the OPC query to synchronize the instrument with the bus controller without using the SCPI status system Append the query to a command The instrument returns a 1 in response to the query For example if you send ROUTe CLOSe 101 OPC the instrument will return a 1 when the command has finished executing Note that if you use this on a scan command the return will not happen until the scan is complete and depending upon your bus controller and the length of the scan list may cause a time out RST This command resets the instrument and returns parameters to their default settings System memory is cleared digital configuration returns to the default state and the error queue is cleared Refer to page 74 for a complete list of the reset conditions 156 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference System Level Control Commands TST This query begins a self test and returns a code to indicate the test status One of the following codes can be returned Returned Meaning Value 0 all tests have passed 1 ROM test failed 2 GPIB test failed 3 RS 232 test failed 4 front panel test failed Note that the self test requires several seconds to run This query wil
279. ule This is especially useful when developing and debugging remote interface commands or watching for an important signal To monitor a channel or a port specify the channel or port number To monitor a plug in module specify the slot number The displayed information is module type dependent as shown on the next page Front Panel Operation To select a channel a digital I O port or a slot press Mon The MON annunciator lights up Press Mon again to exit this state MUX OPEN 101 Monitor a switching channel 101 DIN 255 400 Monitor a DIO Port 400 1 0 5 1 6 9 2 Monitor a MUX or GP module 00 FESS EEO q Monitor a DIO module If only part of the channel status on the module can be displayed at one time press Enter to display the next part Remote Interface Operation To enable the monitor mode send a SCPI command similar to the ones shown below DIAG MON 103 Monitor Channel 108 DIAG MON 400 Monitor a DIO Port 400 DIAG MON 2 Monitor the module in slot 2 To query the slot or channel being monitored send the following SCPI command DIAG MON Returns the slot or channel being monitored Returns 1 if no channel or slot is monitored 80 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Monitoring a Channel or a Slot Example MON Display Description The display for a multiplexer or a GP relay module This 1 0 6 9 f display indicates that the monitored module is in Slot 2 and
280. ules 44474A 16 Bit Digital I O Module 44474A Wiring Information Use the Agilent 44484A Terminal Block to make connections to the 44474A One 44484A is supplied with the module The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external wiring to the 44474A The screw terminal is shown below Additional information about the terminal block is given on page 285 Handshake Lines y LSB y y MSB y Handshake Lines 1 5 WR r LO BYTE BYTE PCL RD STR GND 0123456701234567 250 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44475A Breadboard Module 44475A Breadboard Module The Agilent 44475A Breadboard module provides a means to mount custom designed circuits for use in the mainframe If a desired function is not be available on a standard plug in module the 44475A provides the ideal solution Components are specified but not supplied with the Breadboard module for interfacing the Breadboard to the 3499A B C backplane When these components are used the Breadboard then provides 8 static input and 8 static output lines Two commands are used to control the Breadboard DIAG SPEEK reads data from the input port and DIAG SPOKE writes data to the output port These commands are described on page 1381 Specifications for the 44475A are given on page 342 251 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules 44475A Breadboard Module hown below it board is s 1rcul The 44475A c try Ircul NO PSS S
281. um Scan Rate 80 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION with terminal block Open Channel lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 o Channel Channel lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 0 with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 40 C 50 RH gt 10 o with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 80 RH gt 10 305 Chapter 9 Specifications N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module E AC ISOLATION PERFORMANCE without terminal block Capacitance Open Channel Channel lt 10 pF with 1 channel closed nanne Channel Chassis lt 20 pF Insertion Loss 100 khz lt 0 10 dB with 509 termination 1 Miz lt 0 20 dB 10 MHz lt 0 50 dB Crosstalk 100 yaa lt 70 dB with 509 termination 1 MHZ lt 50 dB 10 MHz lt 30 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with Low Terminal of the input connected to Low Terminal of the output either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 306 Chapter 9 Specifications N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 4x8 Maximum Voltage Terminal Terminal or Terminal Chassis 200 V dc or ac rms Maximum Current Per Channel 1 A dc or ac rms y s Per Module 4 A dc or ac rms Maximum Power Per Channel 60 W dc 62 5 VA ac cons Per Module 240 W de 250 VA ac Thermal Offset lt 3 uV differential Initial Clos
282. ware trigger too fast Too many channels Card in use N2282A execution error Unable to execute this command in local mode RS232 data receiving error Internal command error RS232 only unable to execute on GPIB There are three commands which are allowd only with the RS 232 interface SYSTem LOCal SYSTem REMote SYSTem RWLock 171 Chapter 6 Error Messages Self Test Errors Self Test Errors The errors listed below indicate failures that may occur during a self test in SCPI mode Error Number Description 1 ROM test failed 2 GPIB test failed 3 RS 232 test failed 4 Front panel test failed Note The string 0 returned from a TST command indicates that all the tests have passed In this case PASSED displays on the front panel of the instrument 172 Plug in Modules Plug in Modules This chapter provides a general description simplified schematic and wiring information for each plug in module This chapter contains the following sections N2260A 40 Channel MUX Module on page 176 N2261A 40 Channel GP Relay Module on page 182 N2262A 4 x 8 2 Wire Matrix Switch Module on page 185 N2268A 32 bit Digital I O Module on page 188 N2264A Multifunction Module on page 192 e N2265A Multifunction Module on page 196 N2266A 40 Channel MUX Module on page 200 N2267A 8 Channel High Current GP Module on page 206 N2268A 509 3 0 GHz Dual
283. were received than were expected for this command You have omitted one or more parameters that are required for this command Example ROUT CHAN DEL 10 Program mnemonic too long A command header was received which contained more than the maximum 12 characters allowed Example CONFIGURE EXTERNAL TRIGGER SOURCE 2 Undefined header A command was received that is not valid for this instrument You may have misspelled the command or it may not be a valid command If you are using the short form of this command remember that it may contain up to four letters Examples TRIGG SOUR TIM 167 121 123 124 128 131 134 138 148 151 158 Chapter 6 Error Messages Execution Errors Invalid character in number An invalid character was found in the number specified for a parameter Example TRIG TIMER 12 34 Exponent too large A numeric parameter was found whose exponent was large than 32 000 Too many digits A numeric parameter was found whose mantissa contained more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros Numeric data not allowed The wrong parameter type was found in the command string You may have specified a number where a string or expression was expected or vice versa Examples DISP TEXT 5 0 or ROUT CLOSE 101 Invalid suffix A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter You may have misspelled the suffix Suffix too long A heade
284. witching a Relay Channel Switch modules can be used to route signals to and from your test system This is achieved by closing or opening the relay channels on these modules From the front panel you can open or close one relay channel at a time However over the remote interface multiple relay channels can be operated by a single command if a channel list is specified In addition these open or closed states can be stored and a stored channel setup can be included in a scan list see State Storage on page 106 Whenever a switch module is reset all of the closed relay channels on the module will be opened Whenever the instrument is turned on or reset all of the closed relay channels in the instrument will be opened Front Panel Operation Select a channel press Open or Close Select a slot press and hold Card Reset to open all channels on the selected module Press Shift then press and hold Card Reset to open all channels in the instrument Remote Interface Operation The following commands open and close multiple channels on the modules in slots 1 and 2 OPEN 101 103 107 207 Open multiple channels CLOS 101 103 107 207 Close multiple channels SYST CPON 1 Open all channels on the module in slot 1 Note When an Agilent N2260A or N2266A is configured to the 1 wire mode only one channel on the module can be closed at a time 82 Chapter 4 Features and Functions Configuring a Multiplexe
285. with 509 termination 1 Mhz lt 0 25 dB 10 MHz lt 1 20 dB Crosstalk 100 kiz lt 73 dB with 509 termination pilas lt 53 dB 10 MHz lt 31 dB a With chassis of all instruments connected and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines either directly or via the 3499A B C switching channels 332 Chapter 9 Specifications 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module E INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Total Channels 10 Maximum Voltage Terminal Terminal or Terminal Chassis 250 V dc or ac rms Maxim m Curent Per Channel 2 A dc or ac rms is 5 i Per Module 20 A dc or ac rms Maxim m Power Per Channel 60 W dc 500 VA ac a i Per Module 600 W dc 5000 VA ac Maximum Overvoltage 1400 Vpk Transients Thermal Offset lt 3 uV differential or single ended Initial Closed Channel lt 1Q Resistance Relay Life Dry Load of lt 300 mA amp lt 10 V 108 yoe Maximum Rated Load 105 Maximum Scan Rate 43 Chans sec E DC ISOLATION Open Channel Channel lt 40 C 60 RH gt 10 Q Channel lt 40 C 95 RH gt 1090 with 1 channel closed Channel Chassis lt 40 C 60 RH gt 5x 10 Q with 1 channel closed lt 40 C 95 RH gt 10 Q a Using the 44474A external increment amp channel closed display off 333 Chapter 9 Specifications 44471A 10 Channel GP Relay Module
286. ws specific configurations If the 8 bit DIP switch s configuration does not match the switches or attenuators installed errors or unexpected results will occur S100 w N o ope Attenuator Switch 01 0 ae Attenuator 1 Attenuator 0 Switch 1 Switch 0 Bit Setting Bit 7 6 Bit 5 4 Bit 3 2 Bit 1 0 00 None None None None 01 84904K L 84904K L 87104A B C 87104A B C 10 84906K L 84906K L 87106A B C 87106A B C 11 84907K L 84907K L Reserved Reserved 223 Chapter 7 Plug in Modules N2276B Microwave MUX Attenuator Module N2276B Wiring Information All the microwave switches for the N2276B have SMA female connectors For the attenuators each standard 84904 6 7L model offers two female 2 4 mm connectors and each 84904 6 7L model with option 006 has two female 2 92 mm connectors compatible with SMA connectors When using 84904 6 7L series attenuators be sure to order them with option 006 SMA compatible for wiring convenience The default ribbon cable for connecting attenuators to N2276B is 1 5 m in length The default ribbon cable for connecting switches to N2276B is 1 5 m in length A 1 5m length ribbon cable for connecting microwave switches to the switch connectors on the N2276B is available as Agilent part number N2276 610038 This cable permits the microwave switches to be placed in a convenient location A
287. y format The data display format of individual 8 bit ports can be specified either in binary or decimal formats as described on page 34 Once specified the format applies to all input and output operations on the same port 31 Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation To Use a Digital I O Port Writing to a Digital I O Port You can write data to the built in digital I O port numbered 090 or to one of the built in digital I O port bits numbered 091 through 094 or any one of the 8 bit ports on a digital I O or multifunction module with a DIO function To write to a port 1 Select a digital I O port Use the knob to select the slot and channel number The channel number is in the form of snn where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number In the display DIN indicates that the last operation on the port was a READ and DOUT a WRITE DIN 401 2 Press the Write key DOUT is displayed to indicate the port is now an output port The current port value is displayed DOUT 255 401 3 Edit the value Use the arrow keys to select the to be edited bit the digit to be edited is set to half bright in the display Turn the knob to modify the value Use the arrow keys to select the C next digit and the knob to modify its value DOUT 254 401 4 When the value is the one desired press Enter to output the data to the selected port 5 Press Write again

4 - Keysight

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents